Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 386

Alcatel-Lucent Services

Remote Maintenance Tool Job Aid


(RMT 31.0)
November, 2008

Alcatel-Lucent - Proprietary This Document contains proprietary information of Alcatel-Lucent and is not to be disclosed or used except in accordance with applicable agreements. Copyright 2008 Alcaltel-Lucent Unpublished and Not for Publication All Rights Reserved

Copyright 2008 Alcatel-Lucent


All Rights Reserved Printed in U.S.A.
This document has been developed by the Alcatel-Lucent RAN Methods Organization. This document is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and other countries. It may not be reproduced, distributed, or altered in any fashion by any entity, including other Alcatel-Lucent Business Units or Divisions, without the expressed written consent of the Alcatel-Lucent Global RAN Methods Organization. Accuracy Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing. However, the information is subject to change.

FCC Warning The equipment described in this document has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of the FCC Rules. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with this document, may cause interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his/her own expense.

Security In rare instances, unauthorized individuals make connections to the telecommunications network through the use of remote access features. In such events, applicable tariffs require that the customer pay all network charges for traffic. Alcatel-Lucent cannot be responsible for charges and will not make allowance or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 ii

ABOUT THIS INFORMATION PRODUCT


RMT 31.0 Job Aid Section JA001 OVERVIEW
General Information This information product is a collection of job aid instructions that provide procedures for using the Remote Maintenance Tool (RMT), Release 31.0 with the OneBTS CDMA base station platforms. This job aid does not cover all of the operations that can be performed with RMT. With the use of the embedded RMT On-Line HELP menus, many of the operations available with RMT are self explanatory and therefore not covered within this document. The information provided herein is designed to assist the user in performing maintenance activities, using RMT. Verification and configuration of the EEPROM backplane parameters, including BTS Parameters, CSU/ATM Parameters, Unit Type Descriptors, RF Path Maps, and RF Test Path Maps are the primary areas covered within this document.

Reference to the CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual

This Job Aid does not include RF Power Calibration procedures. All RF Power Calibration procedures performed with RMT are now included in the CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual(s). CDMA RF Power Calibration Manuals can be accessed at: https://wireless.support.lucent.com/amps/ login with valid user name and password, select: Release Information select: CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual

Reason for Issue Safety Labels

Updated for RMT Release 31.0 features. DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION are safety labels used in this information product. They are listed below in order of priority and have the following meanings: DANGER indicates the presence of a hazard that will cause death or severe personal injury if the hazard in not avoided. WARNING indicates the presence of a hazard that can cause death or severe personal injury if the hazard is not avoided. CAUTION indicates the presence of a hazard that will or can cause minor personal injury or property damage if the hazard is not avoided.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 1

OVERVIEW, Continued
Intended Audience The RMT Job Aid is intended for use by field technicians performing OA&M activities on CDMA base station products. This product line includes but is not limited to the following systems listed below in Table 1. Table 1 lists the new product name along the the previous (formally known as) name. To use this information product effectively, the technician must have a general understanding of the base station platforms and a general understanding of wireless telecommunications technology.

Table 1: CDMA Base Station Products Base Station Generation 1 Products Alcatel-Lucent 9218 Base Station Macro HD Alcatel-Lucent 9218 Base Station Macro Alcatel-Lucent 9216 Base Station Compact Base Station Generation 2 Products Alcatel-Lucent 9228 Base Station Macro HD Alcatel-Lucent 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA Alcatel-Lucent 9228 Base Station Macro Alcatel-Lucent 9226 Base Station Compact Alcatel-Lucent 9228 Base Station Macro LP Alcatel-Lucent 9228 Base Station Macro IN Alcatel-Lucent 9223 Base Station Ultra-Compact Alcatel-Lucent 9224 Base Station Sub-Compact EN Alcatel-Lucent 9224 Base Station Sub-Compact Alcatel-Lucent 9222 Base Station Micro Formally Known As High Density 4.0 Modcell 4.0 Compact 4.0 Formally Known As High Density 4.0B Base Station 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA Modcell 4.0B Compact 4.0B Base Station 8420 Base Station 8401 Base Station 3300 Base Station 4401 Base Station 4400 Base Station 2400

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 2

OVERVIEW, Continued
Recommended Customer Training and Other Documentation Customer training for the OneBTS CDMA base station platforms is available through the Alcatel-Lucent Training Organization. Training course CL5690 is recommended to be completed prior working on the base station equipment. Operations, Administration and Maintenance Manual (401-703-407) provides detailed OA&M information and instructions for the 9218/9228 Base Station Macro (formally known as CDMA Modcell 4.0/4.0B) platforms. CDMA Translation Application Note #1-F describes the RF Transmit Path and provides details on the adjustments to the translations that govern the verification and calibration of the forward link transmit power. Wireless Networks CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Radio Access System Planning & Implementation Guide 401-614-101 Wireless Networks CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Base Station Operation, Administration, and Maintenance 401-614-104 Wireless Networks CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Radio Networks Controller Application Processor Operations, Administration & Maintenance 401-614-102 Alcatel-Lucent CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual: 401-703-437 CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual for 9218/9228 Base Station Macro and 9216/9226 Base Station Compact 401-703-438 CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual for 9218 Base Station Macro HD

How to order

Information Products for the OneBTS CDMA platforms can be ordered via telephone or by mail. In most cases, information products must be ordered by the Documentation Coordinator of your company and in accordance with contractual agreements with AlcatelLucent. Order By Telephone: To order information products by telephone, please contact the Alcatel-Lucent Customer Information Center (CIC) at the following numbers:
Telephone: Facsimile: 1 888 582 3688 1 800 566 9568

Order By Mail: To order documents by mail, please send orders to:


Alcatel-Lucent Customer Information Center Order Entry Section 2855 N. Franklin Road P.O. Box 19901 Indianapolis, IN 46219 USA

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 3

OVERVIEW, Continued
Assumptions The procedures in this document assume that the RMT software is available for use and that the OneBTS CDMA platform to be tested has been properly installed and commissioned. CommNet International and CommNet provide the necessary support for installing and configuring RMT on the laptop computer. CommNet International can be reached at: (800) 345-5303. RMT Key Activation First time users are required to obtain an RMT activation key. The following provides instructions for obtaining a key. RMT activation keys can be accessed 24 hours a day, 7 days a week at: https://wireless.support.lucent.com/amps/ login with valid user name and password, select: Wireless AMPS/PCS, select: Utilities/Tools select: RMT Activation Key Tool From this site the Customer will be required to provide the following: A standing order number (SO#). The SO# is a 9-digit number that can be found on the label of the RMT software CD-ROM. It can also be found on the packing slip. An RMT machine ID number. This is obtained when the RMT is first loaded on a PC. When the dialog box appears the machine ID is displayed.

RMT Support

The site contains easy-to-follow, detailed instructions that walk the customer through the key activation process. Activation keys can also be obtained by telephone from the CIC. See How to order in this section for contact numbers. On-line Help In addition to the RMT Job Aid and the Alcatel-Lucent CDMA RF Power Calibration document, the RMT application features an on-line RMT Help Topic Menu that can be accessed while running an RMT session. This on-line help provides descriptions and procedural instructions for running all of the features available with RMT. As noted earlier, this document does not cover all operations that can be performed with RMT. With the use of the On-Line HELP menus, many of the operations available are self explanatory and therefore not covered here.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 4

OVERVIEW, Continued
How to use this Information Product This job aid is divided into five sections with each section defining separate procedures used to perform specific RMT functions. The Series numbering scheme for each section is shown in the table below: Note: If using an electronic copy of this document, press the Ctrl key and click on the desired section to automatically go to that section. Hyperlinks are designated in the blue underscored font.

Section Series JA000 JA100 JA200 JA300 JA400 JA500 JA600

Section Title ABOUT THIS INFORMATION PRODUCT page 1 RMT TEST SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND SETUP page 7 BOOT MEMORY PARAMETERS page 49 BACKPLANE DESCRIPTOR FILES AND PARAMETERS page 91 BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP BACKPLANE PARAMETERS page 187 BTS RF TEST PATH MAP BACKPLANE PARAMETERS page 293 RF POWER CALIBRATION PROCEDURES page 383

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 5

This page intentionally left blank.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 6

RMT TEST SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND SETUP


RMT 31.0 Job Aid Section JA100 GENERAL INFORMATION
Purpose This section provides information for test equipment needed to perform the procedures specified in this job aid and provides procedures for installing and configuring RMT on the laptop computer. Note: If using an electronic copy of this document, click on the desired section to automatically access that section. The following procedures are provided in this section:

Section/Description

Section JA110 - List of Required Test Equipment page 9 Section JA120 - Remote Maintenance Tool (RMT) Laptop Configuration page 11

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 7

This page intentionally left blank.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 8

RMT Test System Description and Setup


Section JA110 - List of Required Test Equipment

GENERAL
Section Description This section specifies the installation test equipment required to perform the procedures defined in this job aid.

REQUIRED TEST EQUIPMENT


Test Equipment List The following table lists the required test equipment to be used to perform the test procedures defined in this job aid.

Table 2: OneBTS CDMA Base Station Test Equipment List


Qty 1 Description Fujitsu LifeBook E Series Multiple Applications Computer (MAC) OR Similar platform

Modular Crossover Ethernet Cable (see pin-out below)

ESD Wrist Strap

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 9

This page intentionally left blank.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 10

RMT Test System Description and Setup


Section JA120 - Remote Maintenance Tool (RMT) Laptop Configuration and Start-Up

GENERAL
Section Description This section provides the procedures to set-up, maintain and initialize the Remote Maintenance Tool (RMT) on the laptop computer. This information is also provided in the RMT Installation and Configuration Guide that is provided with the RMT software CD-ROM. RMT is a software application that runs on a personal laptop computer. RMT interfaces with the cell hardware and provides the ability to perform various configuration and diagnostic functions on the cell hardware. Communication occurs through an Ethernet connection between the laptop computer and the cell equipment. Computers should meet the following hardware requirements to run the RMT application: Intel Pentium 200 MHz MMX Processor (or later, which can be purchased from CommNet International) 256 MB of RAM 500 MB of Hard Disk Space 1024x768, 256 Color Display Ethernet, 10/100 BaseT card (equivalent) Ethernet Cross-over Cable (or equivalent, which can be purchased from CommNet International)

About RMT

Hardware Requirements

Application Software Requirements

Your computer should meet the following software requirements: Windows 2000 with Administrative Rights Windows XP with Administrative Rights Internet Explorer 4.72.3110.8, SP1 Self-install customers can obtain the RMT software from the Alcatel-Lucent Customer Support Center web site at: https://wireless.support.lucent.com/amps/ut_tools/rmtsoft/ Note: A Self-Install license is required before purchasing RMT. Contact your Account Executive or Customer Technical Advocate for more information on purchasing RMT.

Obtaining RMT: Self-Install Customers

RMT Release Information

The RMT Software Release Notes describe the features that were added to the respective software release. The filename is Rnotes.doc (Word format) and is loaded to the computer when RMT is loaded. The document can be found in the following directory: X:\Program Files\Lucent Technologies\RMT\bin.

Where X = drive letter where the RMT software is loaded (normally the C:drive).

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 11

INSTALLING RMT SOFTWARE


Installation Procedure RMT Self-install Customers should refer to the RMT Installation and Configuration Guide that is supplied with the RMT software for software installation procedures. Note: If there is a prior version of RMT on the laptop, it is recommended to remove this version prior to installing the R31.0 load. Go to the Remove Previous RMT Versions below. Remove Previous RMT Versions Follow the steps below to manually remove any previous versions of the RMT software prior to installing this or any other version of the RMT. Step 1 2 Action Open the Start menu and select Settings | Control Panel and double-click on Add/Remove Programs. In the Add/Remove Programs Window, scroll through the list and check for any instance of the RMT. Select each instance and press the Add/Remove button to remove the program. When finished, close the Add/Remove Programs window and the Control Panel Window and proceed with the RMT installation procedures.

Alcatel-Lucent Issued RMT Key

There are two RMT keys needed for RMT. The first issued Alcatel-Lucent Key is required to access RMT software. The second key is needed to access the CSU/ATM Parameters window. The second key is only available to licensed self-install customers. Customers with the Maintenance Only version of RMT do not have access to the second key. Self-install customers can generate and retrieve keys by performing the following steps. Step 1 Action After installing RMT and starting the program for the first time, a dialog box appears displaying an RMT ID and requesting an Alcatel-Lucent Issued Key. The RMT ID is a unique 10-digit number generated when RMT software is installed. Open a web browser and proceed to the Alcatel-Lucent Customer Support Center web site: https://wireless.support.lucent.com/ Enter your user name and password, then click Submit. Scroll down through the links on the left side of the screen and click on: Utilities and Tools (Wireless) Scroll down through the Utilities/Tools in the right column and click on: RMT ACTIVATION KEY Tool Follow the directions on the web page to generate an RMT key using your STANDING ORDER NUMBER and the RMT ID from Step 1 above. Enter this key on the RMT dialog box. Important! The STANDING ORDER NUMBER is a unique 9-digit number assigned to your RMT software purchase and delivered via email. From the RMT main window select Config Authorize Self Install.

2 3 4 5 6

Continued on next page Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 12

INSTALLING RMT SOFTWARE, Continued


Alcatel-Lucent Issued RMT Key (continued)
Step 8 Action An RMT authorization appears with a Machine ID. Use the Machine ID and generate the second key needed to access the Boot Memory Parameters by following the procedures in step 6. Enter the second key and click Authorize Self Install. When the second key is successfully entered the Authorize SelfInstall button will be grayed out as shown below.

Machine ID is shown here

Maint Key is entered here

RMT Technical Questions

For questions about obtaining RMT activation keys, call 888-582-3688, prompt #4, then prompt #1 (USA). This number is staffed Monday-Friday from 7:30 AM until 4:00 PM central time. Or, send email to cicextorders@lucent.com. Please include your company name, contact information, and standing order number in your email. For technical questions or assistance installing RMT software, contact CommNet International at 888-345-2611 (USA and Canada) or 856-719-8463.

Replacing a Computer

If you previously have installed and activated the RMT software on a PC and are now replacing that PC and need to install and activate the software on a new PC, you will not be able to obtain a new activation key for the new PC from this web site. You must contact your Alcatel-Lucent Account Executive to request an activation key for the new PC.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 13

CONFIGURATION AID (CA100) INSTALLATION


Configuration Aid CA100 In addition to RMT, the Configuration Aid CA100 provides the RMT user with a set of cabinet configuration drawings and the associated .xml files that support the various configurations. The following provides steps for accessing and installing the CA100.

Downloading & Installing the CA100

The CDMA Configuration Aid (CA 100) provides overview information for many common CDMA Base Station configurations. The document does not cover every possible configuration of every product. The document includes information on backplane programming, power calibration, and other miscellaneous configuration information. Licensed Self-Install Customers and Alcatel-Lucent Installation can download the CA 100 document from the CIC, http://www.cic.lucent.com. Embedded in the document are .xml files that are used for programming the following backplane parameters:

Unit Type Descriptor (UTD) Primary RF Path Map (PRIM RF PM) RF Test Path Maps (TDU RF TEST PM and MCR RF TEST PM)

Follow the instructions on the first page of the CA-100 document to extract the packaged .xml files. Once extracted to the pc, the bundled CA-100 .xml files are placed in the following directory: C:\Program Files\Lucent Technologies\RMT\config\1bts\Config Aid

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 14

LAPTOP NETWORK SETTINGS


Static IP Address When running RMT software, the laptop IP address must be set to 192.168.168.250. The procedure below explains how to set the laptop IP address for Windows 2000 and Windows XP operating systems.

Windows 2000 or Windows XP Operating System

Use the following steps to set the laptop IP address for a Windows 2000 or Windows XP operating system.

Step 1 2

Action For Windows 2000 insert a PCMCIA Network Interface Card (NIC). NOTE: Windows XP operating systems do not use a NIC card. On the computer desktop, right click on My Network Places and select Properties. NOTE: For some MACs, access My Network Places by: Start My Network Places On the Network Connections window, right click on Local Area Connection and select Properties. NOTE: For some MACs, it is necessary to click View Network Connections in order to access Local Area Connection. On the Local Area Connection Property window, ensure that all of the following items are installed and checked: Client for Microsoft Networks File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Highlight Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click Properties. On the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window, select Use the following IP address: and enter the following values: IP Address: 192.168.168.250 Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway: blank Click OK. On the Local Area Connection Property window, click OK. On the Network Connections window, click File and then select Close. On the desktop, click Start Shutdown, then, on the dropdown menu, select Restart to re-boot the computer.

5 6

7 8 9

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 15

LAPTOP NETWORK SETTINGS, Continued


IP Address Verification (all Operating Systems) Perform the following steps to verify the laptop IP address.

Step 1 2 3 4 5 Power up the MAC Click Start Run. Enter cmd, then click OK In the MS DOS window, enter: ipconfig

Action

Verify the response lists the correct IP address for the Ethernet adapter for the Local Area Network: Example:
C:\>ipconfig Windows 2000 IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection x: IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 192.168.168.250 Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.255.255.0

. 6 Determine if IP address is correct: IF the IP address is ... 192.168.168.250 Other than 192.168.168.250 THEN ... The IP address for the laptop is configured correctly. Go to Step 7. The IP address is incorrect. Reset the laptop IP address as explained previously on page 15, restart the laptop, then repeat this verification procedure.

7 8

Enter exit to exit MS DOS window. Proceed with RMT INITIALIZATION on the next page.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 16

RMT INITIALIZATION
RMT Initialization and Connection On-Line RMT Connection Off-Line RMT Connection RMT supports both On-Line and Off-Line connections to the Base Station. The user must determine which connection method to use depending on the desired maintenance activity. An On-line Connection is where the Base Station is booted to the MSC/RNC and RMT is used to monitor certain status screens and current backplane settings of the Base Station. An Off-line Connection is where the Base Station is booted to RMT (disconnected from the MSC) and RMT is used to set-up and perform various procedures, such as backplane settings and Off-line RF power calibration procedures. CAUTION: The Off-line connection is service affecting. Determine Type of RMT Connection Use the following procedures to determine the RMT connection type.

Step 1

Action Determine the type of RMT connection: IF an . Off-Line RMT connection is desired.. On-Line RMT connection is desired.. THEN go to Remove Controller(s) From Service on the next page. Determine Your Frame Type on page 19.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 17

RMT INITIALIZATION, Continued


Remove Controller(s) From Service If you are connecting to an existing controller that is currently in-service, you will need to remove it from service by disconnecting the T1/E1 facilities from the cell. Use the procedure below to determine if you need to remove the T1/E1 facilities. Step 1 Action Determine if the controller you want to connect to is currently in-service: IF you want to make an off-line RMT connection to ... a controller currently in-service (on-line) OR to perform an off-line RF power calibration on an in-service frame a newly added controller OR a controller not in-service 2 THEN ... remove the T1/E1s from the cell. Go to Step 2. you do NOT need to remove the T1/E1s from the cell. Go to Step 4.

Remove the T1/E1 for the frame. WARNING: This is service affecting! This will take all in-service controllers down on this cell. Make sure you have permission from the customer to proceed. IF the frame type is 9218/9228 Macro - Outdoor 9218/9228 Macro Indoor, 9218/9228 Macro HD, or 9228 Macro MCPA 9228 Macro LP 9228 Macro IN THEN Remove the T1/E1 lightning protectors in the Frame for the URC you want to connect to. Disconnect the facilities at the hatch-plate on the top of the cabinet. NOTE: If not accessible, then disconnect the facilities at the IOU. (See Figure 1, Figure 8, Figure 9, or Figure 10) Disconnect the E1/T1 cable on the HIOU/CIOU (See Figure 2 or Figure 3). Disconnect the E1/T1 cable in the Junction Box at the side of the frame. Disconnect E1 cable at J1 of the HIOU or IOU1 (See Figure 6). Disconnect the E1/T1 cable(s) on the Signal Protection Module (SPM) at the side of the frame (See Figure 4). Disconnect the E1/T1 cable(s) on the front of the unit (see Figure 5). Disconnect the E1/T1 RJ45 type cable(s) on the PIM3 (See Figure 7)

9216/9226 Compact Outdoor 9216/9226 Compact - Indoor 9224 Sub-Compact 9222 Micro

9223 Ultra-Compact 9224 Sub-Compact EN

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 18

RMT INITIALIZATION, Continued


Remove Controller(s) From Service (continued)
Step 3 Action Determine whether security had been enabled. NOTES: This applies to controllers using IPBH/MLPPP backhaul only. For IPBH/MLPPP controllers, release 31.0 introduces the BTS security feature. This feature requires a user name and password when making offline RMT connections to controllers that were previously online with the security mode enabled. The Security Mode is considered enabled when the SECMODE field, of the btssec RCV form, is set to 1. The SECMODE can be set for the entire cell or for the particular CDM. IF security is ... enabled disabled (or the URC is using Frame Relay) 4 THEN ... acquire a user name and password from the MSC to use when making an offline RMT connection. no user name or password is required.

Procedure complete, go to Determine Your Frame Type.

Determine Your Frame Type

There are several frame types. Determine your frame type then go to the appropriate procedure to connect RMT. This process is used for both off-line and on-line RMT connections. Topic Connecting RMT to a 9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, or 9228 Macro MCPA-HD (formerly known as Modcell 4.0/4.0B, HD 4.0/4.0B, or BTS 9228 MCPA-HD) Connecting RMT to 9216/9226 Compact (formerly known as Compact 4.0/4.0B) Connecting RMT to 9222 Micro (formerly known as BTS 2400) Connecting RMT to 9223 Ultra-Compact (formerly known as BTS 3300) Connecting RMT to 9224 Sub-Compact (formerly known as BTS 4400) Connecting RMT to 9224 Sub-Compact EN (formerly known as BTS 4401) Connecting RMT to 9228 Macro IN (formerly known as BTS 8401) Connecting RMT to 9228 Macro LP (formerly known as BTS 8420) Connecting RMT to 9228 Macro MCPA - D (formerly known as BTS 8440-D) See Page 20

22 24 25 26 27 28 30 32

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 19

RMT PHYSICAL CONNECTION


Connecting RMT to a 9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, or 9228 Macro MCPA-HD If your cell is a: 9218/9228 Base Station Macro 9218/9228 Base Station Macro HD 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA M4 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA HD then follow the procedure below to make the RMT physical connections. NOTE: For this procedure the following definitions apply: a classic URC is a 44WW70/B (code located on faceplate) a URC-II/B is a 44WW65/B (code located on faceplate) Step 1 Action Determine where to connect the RMT laptop computer IF an Ethernet Hub * IS being used AND the URC type is classic URC or URC-II/B THEN connect a cross-over OR straight Ethernet cable between the laptop and any available port on the Ethernet hub a cross-over Ethernet cable between the laptop and the Ethernet port on the, IOU. NOTE: See Figure 1 for details. a cross-over Ethernet cable between the laptop and the Ethernet port on the faceplate of the URC-II/B

classic URC is NOT being used URC-II/B

* Ethernet hub is usually located in the growth frame. 2 Set the Shelf ID Selector switch as follows: IF the cabinet is a Primary Growth #1 Growth #2 Growth #3 THEN set the Shelf ID Selector Switch to 0 1 2 3

NOTE: See Figure 1 on the next page for details on setting the Shelf Selector Switch.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 20

RMT PHYSICAL CONNECTION, Continued


Connecting RMT to a 9218/9228 Macro, 9218/9228 Macro HD, or 9228 Macro MCPA-HD (continued)
Step 3 Set the URC Rotary Switch: IF you are connecting to a classic URC in slot 1 classic URC in slot 2 classic URC in slot 3 classic URC in slot 4 URC-II in any slot THEN set the URC rotary switch to 1 2 3 4 Dont care (not necessary to set) Action

NOTE: See Figure 1 for details on setting the URC Rotary Switch. 4 Go to RMT START UP on page 34.

E
B C D

2
3 4

Shelf ID Selector Setting - Description: 0 - Primary 1 - Growth 1 2 - Growth 2

URC Rotary Switch


0 9 8 7 6 5 1 2 3 4

Ethernet Port

E1/T1 Connector Arcnet

RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008

6
7

I2C

Figure 1 : IOU Connections and Switches Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page 21

RMT PHYSICAL CONNECTION, Continued


Connecting RMT to 9216/9226 Compact If your cell is a 9216/9226 Base Station Compact primary or growth frame, then follow the procedure below to make the RMT physical connections. NOTE: For this procedure the following definitions apply: a classic URC is a 44WW70/B (code located on faceplate) a URC-II/B is a 44WW65/B (code located on faceplate) Step 1 Action Determine where to connect the RMT laptop computer IF an Ethernet Hub * IS being used AND the URC type is classic URC or URC-II/B THEN connect a cross-over OR straight Ethernet cable between the laptop and any available port on the Ethernet hub a cross-over Ethernet cable between the laptop and the Ethernet port on the, C-IOU or H-IOU. NOTE: See Figure 2 or Figure 3 for details. a cross-over Ethernet cable between the laptop and the Ethernet port on the faceplate of the URC-II/B

classic URC is NOT being used URC-II/B

* Ethernet hub is usually located in the growth frame. 2 Set the Shelf ID Selector switch as follows: IF the cabinet is a Primary Growth #1 THEN set the Shelf ID Selector Switch to 0 1

NOTE: See Figure 2 or Figure 3 for details on setting the Shelf Selector Switch. 3 Set the URC Rotary Switch: IF you are connecting to a classic URC in slot 1 classic URC in slot 2 URC-II in any slot THEN set the URC rotary switch to 1 2 Dont care (not necessary to set)

NOTE: See Figure 2 or Figure 3 for details on setting the URC Rotary Switch. 4 Go to RMT START UP on page 34.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 22

RMT PHYSICAL CONNECTION, Continued

URC Rotary Sw itch

Shelf ID Selector Setting: 0 - Com pact


E
F

4 7 6 5

2
3

E1/T1 Connector Ethernet Port


Pow er LED

C D

44WEHIOU

Term

J13

J9

Lucent

J16

J8
(m ap of unit jackfield)

J17

9 8

7 65

01 2

J1

3 4

J5

Figure 2 : 9216/9226 Compact HIOU Connections and Switches

U R C R otary S w itch (S 3)

S helf ID S elector (S 2) S etting: 0 - C om pact

Ethernet P ort

P ow er LE D

44WECIOU

01 2

Term

J13

J17

J8

J9

9 8

7 65

J1

3 4

Lucent

J16

ON

N ote: S lide sw itches to the Left for "1". E 1/T1 C onfiguration (S 1)

Figure 3 : 9216/9226 Compact CIOU Connections and Switches Continued on next page Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 23

N ote: S lide switches to the R ight for "0".

CIOU

J7

J4

J5

J6

J2

E 1/T1 C onnector

J2

J7

HIOU

J6

6
7

A
9
6
7

8
9

RMT PHYSICAL CONNECTION, Continued


Connecting RMT to 9222 Micro If your cell is a 9222 Base Station Micro, then follow the procedure below to make the RMT physical connections. NOTE: For this procedure the following definitions apply: a classic URC is a 44WW70/B (code located on faceplate) a URC-II/B is a 44WW65/B (code located on faceplate) Step 1 Action Determine where to connect the RMT laptop computer IF the URC type is a... THEN connect... a cross-over Ethernet cable between the laptop and the URC port (J2-C or J2-F) you wish to connect to on the PIM1. See Figure 4 for more details. a cross-over Ethernet cable between the laptop and the Ethernet port on the faceplate of the URC-II/B

classic URC

URC-II/B

Go to RMT START UP on page 34.

Figure 4 : 9222 Micro PIM1 Connections and Switches Continued on next page Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 24

RMT PHYSICAL CONNECTION, Continued


Connecting RMT to a 9223 UltraCompact If your cell is a 9223 Base Station Ultra-Compact, then follow the procedure below to make the RMT physical connections. NOTE: the cell controller (URC) is built-in to the 9223 base station ultra-compact Step 1 2 Action Connect a cross-over cable between the laptop and the RMT port on the 9223 Base Station Ultra-Compact. See Figure 5. Go to RMT START UP on page 34.

RMT (Left Jack)

T1/E1 Connections (Lower 4 Positions)

Figure 5: 9223 Ultra-Compact Connections

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 25

RMT PHYSICAL CONNECTION, Continued


Connecting RMT to 9224 SubCompact If your cell is a 9224 Base Station Sub-Compact, then follow the procedure below to make the RMT physical connections. NOTE: For this procedure the following definitions apply: a classic URC is a 44WW70/B (code located on faceplate) a URC-II/B is a 44WW65/B (code located on faceplate) Step 1 Action Determine where to connect the RMT laptop computer IF the URC type is a... classic URC THEN connect... a cross-over Ethernet cable between the laptop and the J9 port on the IOU1. See Figure 6 for more details. a cross-over Ethernet cable between the laptop and the Ethernet port on the faceplate of the URC-II/B

URC-II/B

Go to RMT START UP on page 34.

Lucent

J7

J16

J17

J1

J6

J9

RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008

IOU1

Figure 6 : 9224 Sub-Compact IOU1 Connections and Switches Continued on next page

NOT USED

Ethernet Port for RMT Connection

E1 Facilities Connector

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page 26

RMT PHYSICAL CONNECTION, Continued


Connecting RMT to 9224 SubCompact EN If your cell is a 9224 Base Station Sub-Compact EN, then follow the procedure below to make the RMT physical connections. NOTE: For this procedure the following definitions apply: a classic URC is a 44WW70/B (code located on faceplate) a URC-II/B is a 44WW65/B (code located on faceplate) Step 1 Action Determine where to connect the RMT laptop computer IF the URC type is a... THEN connect... a cross-over Ethernet cable between the laptop st and either the RMT URC1 (1 controller) or RMT nd URC2 port (2 controller) on the PIM3. See Figure 7 for more details. a cross-over Ethernet cable between the laptop and the Ethernet port on the faceplate of the URC-II/B

classic URC

URC-II/B

Go to RMT START UP on page 34.

U SER A LA R M 5 - 8

R E C T IF IE R A LA RM 1 -4

T 5 /E 5 T 6 /E 6 ( L IU 2)

T 7 /E 7 T 8 /E 8

D LM A

D LM B

D LM C

RMT URC 2

TTSM

FR A ME A LA R M 1 -4

F IL T E R A

F IL T E R B

F IL T E R C

USER A LA R M 1 - 4

Figure 7 : 9224 Sub-Compact EN PIM3 Connections and Switches Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 27

RMT URC 1

T 1 /E 1 T 2 /E 2 ( L IU 1 )

T 3 /E 3 T 4 /E 4

AMP I 2C

DLM A

ST AT

DLM B

OT

DLM C

DC

A IR F L T

F U SE

RMT PHYSICAL CONNECTION, Continued


Connecting RMT to 9228 Macro IN If your cell is a 9228 Base Station Macro IN, then follow the procedure below to make the RMT physical connections. NOTE: For this procedure the following definitions apply: a classic URC is a 44WW70/B (code located on faceplate) a URC-II/B is a 44WW65/B (code located on faceplate) Step 1 Action Determine where to connect the RMT laptop computer IF an Ethernet Hub * IS being used AND the URC type is classic URC or URC-II/B THEN connect a cross-over OR straight Ethernet cable between the laptop and any available port on the Ethernet hub a cross-over Ethernet cable between the laptop and the Ethernet port on the, IOU. NOTE: See Figure 8 for details. a cross-over Ethernet cable between the laptop and the Ethernet port on the faceplate of the URC-II/B

classic URC is NOT being used URC-II/B

* Ethernet hub is usually located in the growth frame. 2 Set the Shelf ID Selector switch as follows: IF the cabinet is a Primary Growth #1 THEN set the Shelf ID Selector Switch to 0 1

NOTE: See Figure 8 for details on setting the Shelf Selector Switch. 3 Set the URC Rotary Switch: IF you are connecting to a classic URC in slot 1 classic URC in slot 2 classic URC in slot 3 classic URC in slot 4 URC-II in any slot THEN set the URC rotary switch to 1 2 3 4 Dont care (not necessary to set)

NOTE: See Figure 8 for details on setting the URC Rotary Switch. 4 Go to RMT START UP on page 34.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 28

RMT PHYSICAL CONNECTION, Continued


Connecting RMT to 9228 Macro IN (continued)

E
B C D

2
3 4

Shelf ID Selector Setting - Description: 0 - Primary 1 - Growth 1 2 - Growth 2

URC Rotary Switch


0 9 8 7 6 5 1 2 3 4

Ethernet Port

E1/T1 Connector Arcnet

Figure 8 : 9228 Macro IN IOU Connections and Switches Continued on next page

RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008

6
7

I2C

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page 29

RMT PHYSICAL CONNECTION, Continued


Connecting RMT to 9228 Macro LP If your cell is a 9228 Base Station Macro LP, then follow the procedure below to make the RMT physical connections. NOTE: For this procedure the following definitions apply: a classic URC is a 44WW70/B (code located on faceplate) a URC-II/B is a 44WW65/B (code located on faceplate) Step 1 Action Determine where to connect the RMT laptop computer. IF the URC type is a... THEN connect... a cross-over Ethernet cable between the laptop and the Ethernet port on the IOU. See Figure 9 for more details. NOTE: The 9228 Macro LP has the option of having one or two digital shelves so make sure you connect to the IOU for the correct digital shelf. a cross-over Ethernet cable between the laptop and the Ethernet port on the faceplate of the URC-II/B

classic URC

URC-II/B 2

The 9228 Macro LP has the option of having one or two digital shelves. Set the Shelf ID Selector switch as follows: IF the frame has one digital shelf two digital shelves THEN set the Shelf ID Selector Switch to 0 for the single digital shelf 0 for the bottom digital shelf AND 0 for the top digital shelf

NOTE: See Figure 9 for details on setting the Shelf Selector Switch. 3 Set the URC Rotary Switch: NOTE: The 9228 Macro LP has the option of having one or two digital shelves so make sure you set the URC rotary switch on the IOU for the correct digital shelf. IF you are connecting to a classic URC in slot 1 classic URC in slot 2 classic URC in slot 3 classic URC in slot 4 URC-II in any slot THEN set the URC rotary switch to 1 2 3 4 Dont care (not necessary to set)

NOTE: See Figure 9 for details on setting the URC Rotary Switch. 4 Go to RMT START UP on page 34.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 30

RMT PHYSICAL CONNECTION, Continued


Connecting RMT to 9228 Macro LP (continued)

E
B C D

2
3 4

Shelf ID Selector Setting - Description: 0 - Primary 1 - Growth 1 2 - Growth 2

URC Rotary Switch


0 9 8 7 6 5 1 2 3 4

Ethernet Port

E1/T1 Connector Arcnet

Figure 9 : 9228 Macro LP IOU (one per digital shelf) Connections and Switches Continued on next page

RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008

6
7

I2C

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page 31

RMT PHYSICAL CONNECTION, Continued


Connecting RMT to 9228 Macro MCPA - D If your cell is 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA - D, then follow the procedure below to make the RMT physical connections. NOTE: For this procedure the following definitions apply: a classic URC is a 44WW70/B (code located on faceplate) a URC-II/B is a 44WW65/B (code located on faceplate) Step 1 2 Action Connect a cross-over Ethernet cable between the laptop and an available port on the Ethernet hub.. The 9228 Macro MCPA - D comes with two digital shelves, with the option of one or both being equipped with circuit boards. Set the Shelf ID Selector switch as follows: IF the frame has just the bottom (850) digital shelf equipped (top PCS shelf empty) bottom (850) and top (PCS) digital shelves both equipped just the top (PCS) digital shelf equipped (bottom 850 shelf empty) THEN set the Shelf ID Selector Switch to 0 for the bottom digital shelf

0 for the bottom digital shelf AND 1 for the top digital shelf 0 if configured as a primary frame (standalone) 1 if configured as a growth 1 frame 2 if configured as a growth 2 frame 3 if configured as a growth 3 frame

NOTE: See Figure 10 for details on setting the Shelf Selector Switch. 3 Set the URC Rotary Switch: NOTE: The 9228 Macro MCPA has the option of having one or two digital shelves so make sure you set the URC rotary switch on the IOU for the correct digital shelf. IF you are connecting to a classic URC in slot 1 classic URC in slot 2 classic URC in slot 3 classic URC in slot 4 URC-II in any slot THEN set the URC rotary switch to 1 2 3 4 Dont care (not necessary to set)

NOTE: See Figure 10 for details on setting the URC Rotary Switch. 4 Go to RMT START UP on page 34.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 32

RMT PHYSICAL CONNECTION, Continued


Connecting RMT to 9228 Macro MCPA - D (continued)

E
B C D

2
3 4

Shelf ID Selector Setting - Description: 0 - Primary 1 - Growth 1 2 - Growth 2

URC Rotary Switch


0 9 8 7 6 5 1 2 3 4

Ethernet Port

E1/T1 Connector Arcnet

Figure 10 : 9228 Macro MCPA - D IOU (one per digital shelf) Connections and Switches

RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008

6
7

I2C

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page 33

RMT START UP
RMT Initial Start Up Perform the following steps to start the RMT program.

Step 1 2 Boot the laptop computer

Action

Double click the RMT Icon on the desktop of the computer. NOTE: A screen similar to the one shown below will appear. This is the RMT Main screen.

Determine if a second RMT session is required: IF performing an RF power calibration with an Ethernet Hub for CLGC NOTE: This is generally not used. without an Ethernet Hub for CLGC THEN double-click the RMT icon on the laptops desktop to start a second RMT session. Go to Step 4. a second RMT session is not required. Go to Step 4.

Proceed to RMT Version Check on the next page.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 34

RMT START UP, Continued


RMT Version Check Use this procedure to determine which cell generic to boot the cell to.

Step 1 2 3

Action Click on Help About RMT NOTE: An About RMT window will appear with a list of cell generics. Scroll down to view the the list of cell generics that are packaged with the RMT load. Determine which generic to boot to: IF you are connecting to a Voice URC THEN write down the Cell Generic Next to CDMA2K GDF Name NOTE: In this example the cell generic is: F3000DBFA.05). This is the desired cell generic you will need to boot to. 1xEV-DO GDF Name NOTE: In this example the cell generic is: F3000EBFA.05). This is the desired cell generic you will need to boot to.

an EVDO URC

4 5

Click OK to close the About RMT window. Go to Connect to URC on the next page.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 35

RMT START UP, Continued


Connect to URC Perform the following steps to connect to the Base Station via the RMT. NOTE: If using two RMT sessions (for RF calibration with an Ethernet hub), you must start 2 RMT sessions (one for the primary frame, and one for the growth frame). Step 1 Action Click CONNECT on the main RMT screen. NOTE: The Cell Connect Information window should appear:

Select the Connection Type: NOTE: if you are unsure whether security is enabled, then select Direct IF you are making ... a direct connection (security not enabled) a secure shell connection (security is enabled) THEN select ... Direct from the Connection Type drop-down list Secure (SSH) from the Connection Type drop-down list

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 36

RMT START UP, Continued


Connect to URC (continued)
Step 3 button next to Cell Name, to ping the available URCs. The Click on the IP Address window should appear with a list of available URCs. If using an Ethernet Hub, then two or more URCs will appear. Select the desired URC from the list then click OK. Action

NOTE: If no URCs are displayed, then 1. The URC may be re-booting, try again in about 1 minute 2. Your laptop may not be configured correctly for RMT 3. You may not be using the appropriate cable (straight or cross-over). 4 Verify the IP Address of the controller you want to connect to (Refer to URC IP Addresses on page 45) is shown in the Cell Connect Information window then click OK to connect.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 37

RMT START UP, Continued


Connect to URC (continued)
Step 5 Verify RMT is connected: IF ... the RMT window Status shows a green LED next to Connected (as shown in Figure 11) THEN ... Action

the connection was successful. Procedure complete.

The direct connection failed. Security may be enabled on this cell: IF ... the RMT Connection Type window appears (as shown in Figure 12) THEN ... i.) click Yes in the RMT Connection Type window ii.) enter a User Name and Password (supplied by customer) in the Login Credentials window, then click Login. iii.) repeat this step i.) click No in the RMT Connection Type window ii.) repeat steps 1 - 4.

security is enabled on this cell

security is NOT enabled on this cell

Figure 11 : Example of Successful RMT Connection

Figure 12 : Example of Failed Direct Connect

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 38

CELL GENERIC MANAGEMENT


Cell Generic Verification via RMT Perform the following steps to check which Base Station software generics are currently loaded on the Base Station. NOTE: If you are running two RMT sessions (for RF power cal with Ethernet hub), you must perform this procedure in both RMT sessions (once for the primary frame, and once for the growth frame). Step 1 2 Action Click Flash Generics from the RMT main screen. The Select A Cell Technology window will appear. Select the technology type then click OK. NOTE: A Generic Management window will appear.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 39

CELL GENERIC MANAGEMENT, Continued


Cell Generic Verification via RMT (continued)
Step 3 Action Check the Generic Names listed under the Cell portion (top half) of the window. These are the Generics that are currently on the URC you are connected to.

Determine Generic State: IF the generic you need to boot to is displayed in the Cell portion (top half) THEN you do not need to upload the cell generic. i) Click Cancel, ii) go to BOOT AND SOFTWARE ACTIVATION on Page 42. you will need to upload the cell generic from RMT. Go to Cell Generic Upload via RMT on the next page.

NOT displayed in the Cell portion (top half)

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 40

CELL GENERIC MANAGEMENT, Continued


Cell Generic Upload via RMT Perform the following procedures to upload a Generic from the RMT to the Base Station.

Step 1

Action Determine if there is enough memory on URC to upload desired cell generic. IF the Controller type is URC AND the Controller has 1 or fewer generics displayed 2 or more generics displayed THEN there is enough memory. Go to Step 2 there is NOT enough memory: Select an unused generic under Cell Click Delete Repeat Step 1 there is enough memory. Go to Step 2.

URC-II

0 or more generics displayed

2 3 4

Select the cell generic you need to boot to from under the RMT portion of the window, then click Upload Click Yes in the Upload Generic window. NOTE: The Package Status in the Cell window will show as Loading. Wait until the Package Status in the Cell window changes from Loading to Good. NOTES: 1. The upload may take approximately 30 minutes or more to complete. 2. If the upload is interrupted for any reason: a. Do NOT delete the generic b. Restart the upload, the upload will continue where it left off. Click Cancel. Go to BOOT AND SOFTWARE ACTIVATION on the next page.

5 6

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 41

BOOT AND SOFTWARE ACTIVATION


Base Station Boot Perform the following steps to boot the Base Station onto a call processing generic. NOTE: If you are running two RMT sessions (for RF power calibration with an Ethernet hub), you must perform this procedure in both RMT sessions (once for the primary frame, and once for the growth frame). Step 1 Action Click Config Cell Boot from the RMT main screen (as shown in the example below).

2 3

Select the generic you want to boot to from the list by clicking on it. Reboot the cell: IF booting a voice URC an EVDO URC THEN click Reset Active URC Place a check mark next to the UCU (CMU) slot(s) that contain(s) the EVT (BNJ47B) and/or the SB-EVM (BNJ82) board,

then click Reset Active URC

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 42

BOOT AND SOFTWARE ACTIVATION, Continued


Base Station Boot (continued)
Step 4 Action Click OK when the Boot Cell dialogue window appears:

WARNING: With Release 31 or later, the Amplifiers in the MCPA-A frame will automatically receive firmware updates. If an amplifier is receiving a firmware update, the status LED on the amplifier will be blinking orange and yellow during the download. To prevent damage to the amplifier, DO NOT interrupt the download process. The download takes approximately 4 minutes for each amplifier. 5 6 7 Wait approximately 5 minutes until the URC boot is complete. Click CONNECT on the RMT window. Click OK in the Cell Connect Information window. IMPORTANT: Once connected, the Generic Type will display immediately. However, the Intelligent Antenna (IA) portion may require an additional 30 60 seconds to appear. Please wait 60 seconds to determine if IA is enabled before proceeding. NOTE: If you get the following screen:

then Security may be enabled on this cell: IF ... THEN ... i.) click Yes in the RMT Connection Type window ii.) enter a User Name and Password (supplied by customer) in the Login Credentials window, then click Login. iii.) repeat this step i.) click No in the RMT Connection Type window ii.) repeat steps 6 - 7

security is enabled on this cell

security is NOT enabled on this cell

8 9

Verify that the Status is Connected. Proceed to UPDATING NVM AND BOOTROMS on the next page.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 43

UPDATING NVM AND BOOTROMS


Update NVM and BootROMs Use the following procedure to update the BootROMs on various components of the Base Station. NOTE: If you are running two RMT sessions (for RF power calibration with an Ethernet hub), you must perform this procedure in both RMT sessions (once for the primary frame, and once for the growth frame). Step 1 Action On the RMT main screen, click Config Cell Update BootROMs. NOTE: The Version Sync window should appear as shown. Wait one minute for all the components to populate.

Check the status of each component equipped: IF the Current Status is Running NVM Mismatch THEN No update is necessary. Go to Step 3 Unit Needs update: i) Click the box under Select for Update? for components with NVM Mismatch ii) Click Apply iii) Wait until Current Status changes to Running iv) Go to Step 3 Unit update is in progress i) Wait until Current Status changes to Running ii) Go to Step 3

Downloading or Resetting

Click Cancel to exit the Version Sync window. Proceed with RMT testing.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 44

URC IP ADDRESSES
General Starting with RMT 21.0, each URC has a unique local IP number. The RMT Auto-Ping feature will usually find the URC which the laptop is connected to; use the table below if the feature does not work. The IP number can simply be typed into the Cell Name field of the CELL Connect Information window. Also, the table can be used to cross-reference the IP address on the RMT Main screen display to the logical URC number.

Table 3: URC IP Addresses


Frame URC # 1 Primary 2 3 Spare 1 Growth 1 2 3 Spare 1 Growth 2 2 3 Spare 1 Growth 3 2 3 Spare IP Address 192.168.168.16 192.168.168.32 192.168.168.48 192.168.168.64 192.168.168.17 192.168.168.33 192.168.168.49 192.168.168.65 192.168.168.18 192.168.168.34 192.168.168.50 192.168.168.66 192.168.168.19 192.168.168.35 192.168.168.51 192.168.168.67

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 45

TROUBLESHOOTING
Cannot Upload Generics to Cell Using RMT If you are unable to upload cell generics from RMT to the controller in the cell, then refer to the table below for troubleshooting aid.

Possible Problem Conflicting FTP Services running EVDO Access Terminal (AT) registry is corrupt / in conflict

Solution / Action Perform Check for Other Running FTP Services below. If you have loaded software for an EVDO AT, then the software registry may be causing the problem. Currently, the only solution is to load RMT onto another laptop computer.

Check for Other Running FTP Services

Use the following procedure to see if other FTP services are running that are conflicting with RMT.

Step 1 2 3 4 Close RMT if it is running.

Action

Click Start Run, then type CMD and press the Enter key Type ftp localhost in the DOS command window. If you see any other response than Connection Refused, there is an FTP server running on your computer. You must disable this FTP server before using the RMT to upload generics.

Disabling FTP Services

If you find FTP services running on your laptop, use the following steps to disable FTP services. Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Double-click on My Computer. Double-click on Control Panel. Double-click on Administrative Tools. Double-click on Services. Double-click on FTP Publishing Service. Under Startup type, select Disable, then click Apply. Reboot your computer. Action

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 46

TROUBLESHOOTING, Continued
Firewall Software Conflict If you have ANY type of VPN software or FTP software operating on your computer, it is strongly recommended that you disable it. To disable the Alcatel-Lucent IPsec Client VPN firewall, use the following steps. Step 1 Action Click on Start Alcatel-Lucent IPsec Client. NOTE: If Alcatel-Lucent IPsec Client cannot be found, then it most likely is not loaded on this computer. Click on Firewall Allow All Traffic in the Alcatel-Lucent IPsec Client window. Close the Alcatel-Lucent IPsec Client window.

2 3

RMT Ethernet Cables

When RMT is connected directly to a cell Ethernet port, a "crossover" cable is required. An Ethernet Crossover cable is an 8-pin cable with RJ48 connectors at each end and the following pin out: Ethernet Crossover Cable Pin Out Pin 1 to Pin 3 Pin 2 to Pin 6 Pin 3 to Pin 1 Pin 6 to Pin 2 Pin 4 to Pin 4 Pin 5 to Pin 5 Pin 7 to Pin 7 Pin 8 to Pin 8

When RMT is connected to a cell through an Ethernet Hub (Ethernet Switch), a "straight" cable or a crossover cable may be used. An Ethernet Straight cable is an 8-pin cable with RJ48 connectors at each end and direct pin connections: Ethernet Straight Cable Pin Out Pin 1 to Pin 1 Pin 2 to Pin 2 Pin 3 to Pin 3 Pin 6 to Pin 6 Pin 4 to Pin 4 Pin 5 to Pin 5 Pin 7 to Pin 7 Pin 8 to Pin 8

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 47

This page intentionally left blank.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 48

BOOT MEMORY PARAMETERS


RMT 31.0 Job Aid Section JA200 GENERAL INFORMATION
Purpose This section describes procedures for verifying and setting Boot Memory Parameters. The Boot Memory Parameters are verified and set using RMT and are accessed via the pulldown menu as shown below. Boot Memory Parameters include the following: BTS Parameters CSU/ATM Parameters BPSN/MAC Addresses

In conjunction with the on-line RMT HELP menu, the following procedures will aid the user in verifying and setting these backplane parameters. Note: Customers with the Maintenance Only version of RMT do not have access to these parameters. The following procedures are provided in this section: Section/Description

Section JA210 Verifying and Setting Boot Memory Parameters on page 51

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 49

This page intentionally left blank.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 50

Boot Memory Parameters


Section JA210 Verifying and Setting Boot Memory Parameters GENERAL
Section Description This section describes procedures for verifying and setting the BTS, CSU/ATM and the Backplane Serial Number and MAC Address backplane parameters. Note: Customers with the Maintenance Only version of RMT do not have access to these parameters. Boot Memory Parameters are verified and set using the Remote Maintenance Tool (RMT). It is assumed that the cell equipment has already been integrated and is in-service, meaning the backplane parameter programming was completed at the time of cell integration and commissioning. The procedures specified herein are to be performed if problems occur during the operation of the cell equipment or when updates need to be made to the existing BMP. Backplane parameters can be reviewed with the cell site either on-line or off-line via the RMT connection. It is highly recommended that whenever changes or updates are made to the backplane parameters that the cell is removed from service. Note: When creating or modifying .xml files always save a copy of the original file to the appropriate directory folder on your computer.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 51

FACILITIES DISCONNECTION
Introduction This section provides the procedures for disconnecting facilities from the cell.

Facilities Disconnection

Remove the facilities connection between the switch and the cell before performing RMT standalone testing. Follow the procedures below to disconnect the facilities.

Step 1

Action Disconnect the facilities using one of the following methods: OR Disconnect the facilities at the lightning protection point. OR OR Disconnect the facilities at the top of the Indoor Cabinet (J101-J103). See Figure 13: Top View of Indoor Cabinet on page 53 for the Top View of the Input/Output Hatch Plate Panel. Disconnect facilities at the input/output unit (IOU). See Figures 1 9, starting on page 21, for the various IOU types. Disconnect the facilities at the demarcation point (SmartJack, NIU, or similar),

With T1/E1 facilities disconnected, verify the URC faceplate LEDs are illuminated RED for all equipped T1 Spans.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 52

FACILITIES DISCONNECTION, Continued

Facilities Connector
ALARM BUS J103 GPS J102 J101 15MH z

T1

Figure 13: Top View of Indoor Cabinet

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 53

BEFORE GETTING STARTED


Select the BTS Procedure Use the following table to go to the appropriate procedure.

IF updating a Voice URC 1xEV-DO URC

THEN follow the SETTING VOICE BTS PARAMETERS procedure on the next page. SETTING EVDO BTS PARAMETERS on page 67.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 54

SETTING VOICE BTS PARAMETERS


Configure Voice BTS Parameters Use the following procedure to configure Voice BTS Parameters. NOTE: For EVDO Controllers, use SETTING EVDO BTS PARAMETERS on page 67. Step Action Make an OFFLINE connection with RMT to a cell Voice Controller (URC). Click Config Cell Boot Memory Parameters BTS Parameters from the RMT main menu. The following BTS Parameters window will appear:

1 2

Figure 14: Voice BTS Parameters


NOTE: Do not use this screen to obtain the Backplane Serial number. See BACKPLANE SERIAL NUMBER AND MAC ADDRESS on page 90 for procedures on viewing the Backplane Serial number and MAC Address.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 55

SETTING VOICE BTS PARAMETERS, Continued


Configure Voice BTS Parameters (continued)
Step Action Determine the Voice URC to update. IF updating CDM 1, 5, 9, or 13 2, 6, 10, or 14 3, 7, 11, or 15 THEN set Select the URC you want to update to 1 2 3

NOTE: For EVDO URCs, use SETTING EVDO BTS PARAMETERS on page 67.

Verify BTS Serial Number is set. NOTE: The BTS Serial Number is normally set by the factory and is unique to each Base Station. For most frame types, the BTS Serial Number (Alcatel-Lucent SN Barcode) can be found inside the cabinet on the top left of the side panel (left of the filters) or on the front door.

Set GPS Antenna Length to the Customers specified value. NOTE: This field must be set to +/- 50 feet of the actual antenna length.

6 7 8 9

Click Apply on the BTS Parameters window. Repeat Steps 3 6 for each equipped Voice URC. Click Cancel to close the BTS Parameters window. Proceed to SETTING VOICE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS on the next page.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 56

SETTING VOICE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS


Configure Voice Trunk Group Controller Parameters Use the following procedure to configure Voice Trunk Group Controller Parameters (TGCPs). NOTE: For EVDO Controllers, use SETTING EVDO CSU/ATM PARAMETERS on page 69.

Step

Action Click Config Cell Boot Memory Parameters CSU/ATM Parameters from the RMT main menu. The following Configure Boot Memory Parameters window appears:

Trunk Group Controller Parameters Tab

Record Version Number

Current Controller

Figure 15: Voice Trunk Group Controller Parameters (TGCP) Tab

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 57

SETTING VOICE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS, Continued


Configure Voice Trunk Group Controller Parameters (continued)
Step Action Determine the Voice URC to update. THEN set Select the URC you want to update to 1 2 3

IF updating CDM 1, 5, 9, or 13 2, 6, 10, or 14 3, 7, 11, or 15

NOTE: For EVDO URCs, use SETTING EVDO CSU/ATM PARAMETERS on page 69.

Determine the current Version No. (located near the top of the window). Update to Version 4 as necessary:

IF the current Record Version is 4

THEN No update needed. Proceed to Step 4. Use the Record Version Upgrade Procedure on page 88 and then continue with Step 4 on the next page. Do not exit the Configure Boot Memory Parameter window.

0, 1, 2, or 3

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 58

SETTING VOICE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS, Continued


Configure Voice Trunk Group Controller Parameters (continued)
Step Action Click Recall under TGCP Configuration File and select a TGCP file to recall using the following table: IF backhaul type is THEN a) Select the appropriate file listed in Table 4 on page 60 make sure to navigate to the correct frame directory (Growth1, Growth2, Growth3, Primary). b) Proceed to Step 5. a) Select the appropriate file listed in Table 5 on page 61. b) Proceed to Step 5.

Frame Relay (FR)

IP Backhaul (IPBH)

NOTE 1: For T1 TGCP files, if the NIU is passive, or if the cable length between the NIU and frame is greater then 133 feet, or if the NIU / cable length configuration is unknown, select the Long Haul (default) folder. Select the Short Haul (only for Active NIU 0-133 feet) folder ONLY if the span is on an active NIU and the cable length between the NIU and frame is 133 feet or less. Active NIU is defined as an NIU that is providing signal gain to the T1 (consult customer if there is a question as to whether the NIU is active or not). If no information is available on the NIU status, select the Long Haul Default folder. NOTE 2: Recalling a TGCP XML file sets TGM parameters to default values as shown in Table 10 on page 87. If a file cannot be found or non-default TGM values are desired, refer to CREATE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS on page 78 for procedures to manually set TGCP parameters.

5 6

Click Open. Click OK if the following pop-up windows appears:

Without exiting the Configure Boot Memory Parameter screen, proceed to Configure Voice Initial Link Configuration Parameters on page 62.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 59

SETTING VOICE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS, Continued


Configure Voice Trunk Group Controller Parameters (continued)
Table 4: Voice TGCP Files for Frame Relay
File Location

File Name The File Names shown are for the Primary Frame Only

T1 Long Haul T1 Short Haul E1

URC 1 URC 2 URC 3 URC 1 URC 2 URC 3 URC 1 URC 2 URC 3

TGCP - CDM 1 - FR - T1 Long Haul - v4.xml TGCP - CDM 2 - FR - T1 Long Haul - v4.xml TGCP - CDM 3 - FR - T1 Long Haul - v4.xml TGCP - CDM 1 - FR - T1 Short Haul - v4.xml TGCP - CDM 2 - FR - T1 Short Haul - v4.xml TGCP - CDM 3 - FR - T1 Short Haul - v4.xml TGCP - CDM 1 - FR - E1 - v4.xml TGCP - CDM 2 - FR - E1 - v4.xml TGCP - CDM 3 - FR - E1 - v4.xml

NOTE: File names shown above are for the Primary Frame only. Navigate to the correct directory for the frame where the CDM is located (i.e. either Growth 1, Growth 2, Growth 3, or Primary). Recall the correct TGCP file for the CDM.

Continued on next page Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 60

SETTING VOICE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS, Continued


Configure Voice Trunk Group Controller Parameters (continued)
Table 5: Voice TGCP Files for IPBH
File Location

File Name The File Names shown are for CDMs with their own T1/E1s only

T1 Long Haul T1 Short Haul E1

URC 1 URC 2 URC 3 URC 1 URC 2 URC 3 URC 1 URC 2 URC 3

TGCP - CDM (1-5-9-13) - IPBH - T1 Long Haul - v4.xml TGCP - CDM (2-6-10-14) - IPBH - T1 Long Haul - v4.xml TGCP - CDM (3-7-11-15) - IPBH - T1 Long Haul - v4.xml TGCP - CDM (1-5-9-13) - IPBH - T1 Short Haul - v4.xml TGCP - CDM (2-6-10-14) - IPBH - T1 Short Haul - v4.xml TGCP - CDM (3-7-11-15) - IPBH - T1 Short Haul - v4.xml TGCP - CDM (1-5-9-13) - IPBH - E1 - v4.xml TGCP - CDM (2-6-10-14) - IPBH - E1 - v4.xml TGCP - CDM (3-7-11-15) - IPBH - E1 - v4.xml

NOTE: File names shown are for CDMs with their own T1/E1s. IPBH voice CDMs using spans on another voice CDM is currently not supported. NOTE: Channel Associated Signaling (CAS) is not supported for IPBH. Any offices with CAS E1 framing will require a conversion to Common Channel Signaling (CCS) framing while still on FR prior to implementing IPBH.

Continued on next page Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 61

SETTING VOICE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS, Continued


Configure Voice Initial Link Configuration Parameters Use the following procedure to configure Voice Initial Link Configuration Parameters (ILCPs). NOTE: For EVDO Controllers, use SETTING EVDO CSU/ATM PARAMETERS on page 69.

Step

Action Click the Initial Link Configuration Parameters Tab. Initial Link Configuration Parameters Tab Current Controller

Figure 16: Voice Initial Link Configuration Parameters (ILCP) Tab

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 62

SETTING VOICE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS, Continued


Configure Voice Initial Link Configuration Parameters (continued)
Step Action Click Recall under ILCP Configuration File and select an ILCP file to recall using the following table: IF backhaul type is Frame Relay (FR) THEN a) Select the appropriate ILCP file listed in Table 6 on page 65. b) Proceed to Step 3. a) Select the appropriate ILCP file listed in Table 7 on page 66. b) Proceed to Step 3.

IP Backhaul (IPBH)

NOTE 1: For T1 ILCP files, if the NIU is passive, or if the cable length between the NIU and frame is greater then 133 feet, or if the NIU / cable length configuration is unknown, select the Long Haul (default) folder. Select the Short Haul (only for Active NIU 0-133 feet) folder ONLY if the span is on an active NIU and the cable length between the NIU and frame is 133 feet or less. Active NIU is defined as an NIU that is providing signal gain to the T1 (consult customer if there is a question as to whether the NIU is active or not). If no information is available on the NIU status, select the Long Haul Default folder. NOTE 2: Recalling an ILCP XML file sets TGM parameters to default values as shown in Table 10 on page 87. If a file cannot be found or non-default TGM values are desired, refer to CREATE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS on page 78 for procedures to manually set ILCP parameters.

3 4

Click Open. Click OK if the pop-up window below appears:

5 6

Click Apply on the Configure Boot Memory Parameters window and verify the response Backplane Successfully Updated appears. Click Cancel to close Configure Boot Memory Parameters window.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 63

SETTING VOICE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS, Continued


Configure Voice Initial Link Configuration Parameters (continued)
Step Action Determine the next procedure to execute. IF Another Voice URC needs to be updated No other Voice URC needs to be updated THEN Return to Configure Voice Trunk Group Controller Parameters on page 57. Proceed to the next step below.

Determine the next procedure to execute. IF EVDO URCs are AND Boot Memory Parameters need to be updated No Boot Memory update is needed Not equipped N/A THEN a) Click DISCONNECT to disconnect RMT b) Proceed to SETTING EVDO BTS PARAMETERS on page 67. Proceed to FINAL PROCEDURES on page 77. Proceed to FINAL PROCEDURES on page 77.

Equipped

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 64

SETTING VOICE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS, Continued


Configure Voice Initial Link Configuration Parameters (continued)
Table 6: Voice ILCP Files for Frame Relay
File Location

File Name The File Names shown are for the Primary Frame Only

T1 Long Haul T1 Short Haul E1

URC 1 URC 2 URC 3 URC 1 URC 2 URC 3 URC 1 URC 2 URC 3

ILCP - CDM 1 - FR - T1 Long Haul - v4.xml ILCP - CDM 2 - FR - T1 Long Haul - v4.xml ILCP - CDM 3 - FR - T1 Long Haul - v4.xml ILCP - CDM 1 - FR - T1 Short Haul - v4.xml ILCP - CDM 2 - FR - T1 Short Haul - v4.xml ILCP - CDM 3 - FR - T1 Short Haul - v4.xml ILCP - CDM 1 - FR - E1 - v4.xml ILCP - CDM 2 - FR - E1 - v4.xml ILCP - CDM 3 - FR - E1 - v4.xml

NOTE: File names shown above are for the Primary Frame only. Navigate to the correct directory for the frame where the CDM is located (i.e. either Growth 1, Growth 2, Growth 3, or Primary). Recall the correct ILCP file for the CDM.

Continued on next page Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 65

SETTING VOICE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS, Continued


Configure Voice Initial Link Configuration Parameters (continued)
Table 7: Voice ILCP Files for IPBH
File Location

File Name The File Names shown are for CDMs with their own T1/E1s only

T1 Long Haul T1 Short Haul E1

URC 1 URC 2 URC 3 URC 1 URC 2 URC 3 URC 1 URC 2 URC 3

ILCP - CDM (1-5-9-13) - IPBH - T1 Long Haul - v4.xml ILCP - CDM (2-6-10-14) - IPBH - T1 Long Haul - v4.xml ILCP - CDM (3-7-11-15) - IPBH - T1 Long Haul - v4.xml ILCP - CDM (1-5-9-13) - IPBH - T1 Short Haul - v4.xml ILCP - CDM (2-6-10-14) - IPBH - T1 Short Haul - v4.xml ILCP - CDM (3-7-11-15) - IPBH - T1 Short Haul - v4.xml ILCP - CDM (1-5-9-13) - IPBH - E1 - v4.xml ILCP - CDM (2-6-10-14) - IPBH - E1 - v4.xml ILCP - CDM (3-7-11-15) - IPBH - E1 - v4.xml

NOTE: File names shown are for CDMs with their own T1/E1s. IPBH voice CDMs using spans on another voice CDM is currently not supported.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 66

SETTING EVDO BTS PARAMETERS


Configure EVDO BTS Parameters Use the following procedure to configure EVDO BTS Parameters. NOTE: For Voice Controllers, use SETTING VOICE BTS PARAMETERS on page 55. Step Action Make an OFFLINE RMT connection to a cell EVDO Controller (URC). Click Config Cell Boot Memory Parameters BTS Parameters from the RMT main menu. The BTS Parameters window will appear as shown in the example below:

1 2

Figure 17: EVDO BTS Parameters


NOTE: Do not use this screen to obtain the Backplane Serial number. See BACKPLANE SERIAL NUMBER AND MAC ADDRESS on page 90 for procedures on viewing the Backplane Serial number and MAC Address.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 67

SETTING EVDO BTS PARAMETERS, Continued


Configure EVDO BTS Parameters (continued)
Step Action Determine the EVDO URC to update. IF updating CDM 1, 5, 9, or 13 2, 6, 10, or 14 3, 7, 11, or 15 THEN set Select the URC you want to update to 1 2 3

NOTE: For Voice URCs, use SETTING VOICE BTS PARAMETERS on page 55.

Verify the BTS Serial Number is set. NOTE: The BTS Serial Number is normally set by the factory and is unique to each Base Station. For most frame types the BTS Serial Number (Alcatel-Lucent SN Barcode) can be found inside the cabinet on the top left of the side panel (left of the filters) or on the front door.

Set GPS Antenna Length to Customers specified value. NOTE: This field must be set to +/- 50 feet of the actual antenna length.

6 7 8 9

Click Apply from the BTS Parameters window. Repeat Steps 3 6 for each equipped EVDO URC. Cancel to close the BTS Parameters window. Proceed to SETTING EVDO CSU/ATM PARAMETERS on the next page.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 68

SETTING EVDO CSU/ATM PARAMETERS


Configure EVDO Trunk Group Controller Parameters Use the following procedure to configure EVDO Trunk Group Controller Parameters. NOTE: For Voice Controllers, use SETTING VOICE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS on page 57.

Step

Action Click Config Cell Boot Memory Parameters CSU/ATM Parameters from the RMT main menu. The following Configure Boot Memory Parameters window will appear:

Trunk Group Controller Parameters Tab

Record Version Number

Current Controller

Figure 18: EVDO Trunk Group Controller Parameters (TGCP) Tab

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 69

SETTING EVDO CSU/ATM PARAMETERS, Continued


Configure EVDO Trunk Group Controller Parameters (continued)
Step Action Determine the EVDO URC to update. THEN set Select the URC you want to update to 1 2 3

IF updating CDM 1, 5, 9, or 13 2, 6, 10, or 14 3, 7, 11, or 15

NOTE: For Voice URCs, use SETTING VOICE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS on page 57.

Determine the current Version No. (located near the top of the screen). Update to Version 4 as necessary:

IF the current Record Version is 4

THEN No update needed. Proceed to Step 4. Use the Record Version Upgrade Procedure on page 88 and then continue with Step 4 on the next page. Do not exit the Configure Boot Memory Parameter window.

0, 1, 2, or 3

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 70

SETTING EVDO CSU/ATM PARAMETERS, Continued


Configure EVDO Trunk Group Controller Parameters (continued)
Step Action Click Recall under TGCP Configuration File and select a TGCP file to recall using the following table: NOTE 1: For T1 TGCP files, if the NIU is passive, or if the cable length between the NIU and frame is greater then 133 feet, or if the NIU / cable length configuration is unknown, select the Long Haul (default) folder. Select the Short Haul (only for Active NIU 0-133 feet) folder ONLY if the span is on an active NIU and the cable length between the NIU and frame is 133 feet or less. Active NIU is defined as an NIU that is providing signal gain to the T1 (consult customer if there is a question as to whether the NIU is active or not). If no information is available on the NIU status, select the Long Haul Default folder. NOTE 2: Recalling a TGCP XML file sets TGM parameters to default values as shown in Table 10 on page 87. If a file cannot be found or non-default TGM values are desired, refer to CREATE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS on page 78 for procedures to manually set TGCP parameters.

5 6

Click Open. Click OK if the pop-up window below appears:

Proceed to Configure EVDO Initial Link Configuration Parameters on page 73.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 71

SETTING EVDO CSU/ATM PARAMETERS, Continued


Configure EVDO Trunk Group Controller Parameters (continued)
Table 8: EVDO TGCP Files for PPP
File Location

File Name The File Names shown are for CDMs with their own T1/E1s only

T1 Long Haul T1 Short Haul E1

URC 1 URC 2 URC 3 URC 1 URC 2 URC 3 URC 1 URC 2 URC 3

TGCP - CDM (1-5-9-13) - PPP - T1 Long Haul - v4.xml TGCP - CDM (2-6-10-14) - PPP - T1 Long Haul - v4.xml TGCP - CDM (3-7-11-15) - PPP - T1 Long Haul - v4.xml TGCP - CDM (1-5-9-13) - PPP - T1 Short Haul - v4.xml TGCP - CDM (2-6-10-14) - PPP - T1 Short Haul - v4.xml TGCP - CDM (3-7-11-15) - PPP - T1 Short Haul - v4.xml TGCP - CDM (1-5-9-13) - PPP - E1 - v4.xml TGCP - CDM (2-6-10-14) - PPP - E1 - v4.xml TGCP - CDM (3-7-11-15) - PPP - E1 - v4.xml

NOTE: File names shown are for CDMs with their own T1/E1s. If the CDM uses T1/E1s on another URC, navigate to the correct directory and select file TCGP TGCs all unequipped.xml.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 72

SETTING EVDO CSU/ATM PARAMETERS, Continued


Configure EVDO Initial Link Configuration Parameters Use the following procedure to configure EVDO Initial Link Configuration Parameters. NOTE: For Voice Controllers, use SETTING VOICE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS on page 57.

Step

Action Click the Initial Link Configuration Parameters Tab. Initial Link Configuration Parameters Tab Current Controller

Figure 19: EVDO Initial Link Configuration Parameters (ILCP) Tab (Controller 3 Shown) Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 73

SETTING EVDO CSU/ATM PARAMETERS, Continued


Configure EVDO Initial Link Configuration Parameters (continued)
Step Action Click Recall under ILCP Configuration File and select an ILCP file to recall using the following table: NOTE 1: For T1 ILCP files, if the NIU is passive, or if the cable length between the NIU and frame is greater then 133 feet, or if the NIU / cable length configuration is unknown, select the Long Haul (default) folder. Select the Short Haul (only for Active NIU 0-133 feet) folder ONLY if the span is on an active NIU and the cable length between the NIU and frame is 133 feet or less. Active NIU is defined as an NIU that is providing signal gain to the T1 (consult customer if there is a question as to whether the NIU is active or not). If no information is available on the NIU status, select the Long Haul Default folder. NOTE 2: If the file is not found, refer to CREATE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS on page 78 to manually set ILCP parameters.

3 4

Click Open. Click OK if the pop-up window below appears:

5 6

Click Apply on the Configure Boot Memory Parameters window. Verify Backplane Successfully Updated (text appears above the Apply Button).

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 74

SETTING EVDO CSU/ATM PARAMETERS, Continued


Configure EVDO Initial Link Configuration Parameters (continued)
Step Action Click Cancel to close the Configure Boot Memory Parameters window. Determine the next procedure to execute. IF Another EVDO URC needs to be updated No other EVDO URC needs to be updated THEN Return to Configure EVDO Trunk Group Controller Parameters on page 69. Proceed to FINAL PROCEDURES on page 77.

7 8

Determine the next procedure to execute. IF a Voice URC is AND Boot Memory Parameters need to be updated No Boot Memory update is needed Not equipped N/A THEN a) Click DISCONNECT to disconnect RMT. b) Proceed to SETTING VOICE BTS PARAMETERS on page 55. Proceed to FINAL PROCEDURES on page 77. Proceed to FINAL PROCEDURES on page 77.

Equipped

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 75

SETTING EVDO CSU/ATM PARAMETERS, Continued


Configure EVDO Initial Link Configuration Parameters (continued)
Table 9: EVDO ILCP Files for PPP
File Location

File Name The File Names shown are for CDMs with their own T1/E1s only

T1 Long Haul T1 Short Haul E1

URC 1 URC 2 URC 3 URC 1 URC 2 URC 3 URC 1 URC 2 URC 3

ILCP - CDM (1-5-9-13) - PPP - T1 Long Haul - v4.xml ILCP - CDM (2-6-10-14) - PPP - T1 Long Haul - v4.xml ILCP - CDM (3-7-11-15) - PPP - T1 Long Haul - v4.xml ILCP - CDM (1-5-9-13) - PPP - T1 Short Haul - v4.xml ILCP - CDM (2-6-10-14) - PPP - T1 Short Haul - v4.xml ILCP - CDM (3-7-11-15) - PPP - T1 Short Haul - v4.xml ILCP - CDM (1-5-9-13) - PPP - E1 - v4.xml ILCP - CDM (2-6-10-14) - PPP - E1 - v4.xml ILCP - CDM (3-7-11-15) - PPP - E1 - v4.xml

NOTE: File names shown are for CDMs with their own T1/E1s. If the CDM uses T1/E1s on another URC, navigate to the correct directory and select the ILCP file for the URC with the T1/E1s.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 76

FINAL PROCEDURES
Disconnect RMT Use the following procedure to complete RMT testing. Step 1 2 3 4 5 Action Click DISCONNECT on the RMT screen. Click File Exit. Remove all test equipment connections from the cabinet. For example disconnect the crossover cable from the IOU/HIOU/CIOU. Reconnect the T1/E1. Determine the next procedure to execute. IF THEN Press the RESET button on the front face plate of the Digital Module. RESET The Base Station is a 9223 Base Station UltraCompact

Any other Base Station

reseat all the equipped URCs. CAUTION: Unscrew URCs

Secure the cabinet door.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 77

CREATE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS


Trunk Group Controller Overview The figure below shows an overview of the six possible Trunk Group Controllers (TGCs) for a URC. However each URC uses only one TGC as specified in the TGC to Use parameter on the ILCP tab. Therefore only one TGC should be configured on the TGCP tab. A TGM represents the T1/E1 facility. There are up to 8 Trunk Group Members (TGMs) per TGC.

Figure 20: Trunk Group Controller Parameters Overview


NOTE: Additional information about the Boot Memory Parameters can be found in the RMT Help Menu (Help Help Topics).

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 78

CREATE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS, Continued


Connect with RMT Use the following procedure to make an Offline connection with RMT.

Step 1 2 3

Action Connect with RMT. Refer to the RMT INITIALIZATION procedures on page 17. Click Cell Config Boot Memory Parameters CSU/ATM Parameters Determine the URC to update. IF updating CDM 1, 5, 9, or 13 2, 6, 10, or 14 3, 7, 11, or 15 THEN set Select the URC you want to update to 1 2 3

Go to Set Trunk Group Controller Parameters on the next page.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 79

CREATE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS, Continued


Set Trunk Group Controller Parameters Use the following procedure to manually set Trunk Group Controller (TGC) Parameters.

Step 1

Action Using the up/down arrows, scroll through all six TGC Unit Id records (1-6) and set the Configured TGC field as follows: IF the TGC Unit ID value THEN Place a checkmark () in the Configured TGC field. Matches the value in field Select the URC you want to update NOTE: Only one Configured TGC should be checked. Does not match the value in Select the URC you want to update Make sure there is no check mark in the Configured TGC field.

After completing Step 1, set TGC Unit ID to match the value in Select the URC you want to update. NOTE: This should be the only TGC Unit ID with Configured TGC checked ().

In this example, both values are set to 2 (for URC 2).

3 4 5 6

Set TGC Type to LIU. Set Clock Priority to 1. Set TGM Type to E1/T1 Go to Set Trunk Group Member on next page.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 80

CREATE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS, Continued


Set Trunk Group Members Use the following procedure to manually set Trunk Group Member (TGM) parameters associated with the configured Trunk Group Controller (TGC). Step 1 2 Set TGM Unit Id to 1. Place a checkmark () in the Configured E1/T1 field. Action

NOTE: Each TGM (1-8) corresponds to a T1/E1 facility span (1-8). If the span is not present, it is still recommended to check () the Configured E1/T1 field. 3 4 Make sure there is no checkmark in the Enable Daisy Chain box. Set Mode according to the following table: IF the cell is located in North America (NAR) Anywhere but NAR 5 Set Line Coding according to the following table: IF Mode is set to T1 E1 6 Set Framing Mode according to the following table: IF Mode is set to T1 T1 E1 7 AND Line Coding is set to AMI B8ZS HDB3 THEN set Framing Mode to D4 ESF NoCRC THEN set Line Coding to AMI or B8ZS (customer defined) HDB3 THEN set Mode to T1 E1

Set Signaling according to the following table: IF Mode is set to ... T1 AND you have Clear Channel Signaling (CCS) Channel Associated Signaling (CAS) Clear Channel Signaling (CCS) THEN set Signaling to ... CCS/Clear Channel CAS CCS/Clear Channel

E1

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 81

CREATE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS, Continued


Set Trunk Group Members (continued)
Step 8 9 Set Rate to 64k Set Long/Short Haul according to the following table: IF a) Mode is set to T1, and b) the cell has an Active Network Interface Unit (NIU), and c) the distance from the NIU to the cell is 0 to 133 feet Otherwise 10 THEN set Long/Short Haul to Action

Short

Long

Set Line Build Out/Equalization according to the following table: IF Mode is set to T1 T1 E1 AND Long/Short Haul is set to Long Short Long THEN set Line Build Out to 0 dB 0-133 feet E1 LH

11

Set Time Slot Mask according to the following table: IF Mode is set to T1 E1 AND Signaling is set to CCS/Clear Channel CAS/Channel Associated Signaling CCS/Clear Channel THEN set Time Slot Mask to 0x00ffffff 0xfffefffe 0xfffffffe

12 13

Set Clock Priority field to equal the TGM Unit ID (i.e. for TGM 1 set Clock Priority to 1). Check () the following Options: Enable Inband Loopbacks Enable Facility Data Link Loopbacks Enable ANSI PRMs Respond to AT&T FDL Msgs Enable Yellow Alarms

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 82

CREATE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS, Continued


Set Trunk Group Members (continued)
Step 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Action Set TGM Unit Id to 2 and then repeat Steps 2-13. Set TGM Unit Id to 3 and then repeat Steps 2-13. Set TGM Unit Id to 4 and then repeat Steps 2-13. Set TGM Unit Id to 5 and then repeat Steps 2-13. Set TGM Unit Id to 6 and then repeat Steps 2-13. Set TGM Unit Id to 7 and then repeat Steps 2-13. Set TGM Unit Id to 8 and then repeat Steps 2-13. Do not exit the Configure Boot Memory Parameters window. Proceed to Set Initial Link Configuration Parameters on page 84.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 83

CREATE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS, Continued


Initial Link Configuration Overview Link type or backhaul is specified on the Initial Link Configuration Parameters tab. The figure below shows a controller that has link type set to Frame Relay.

Figure 21: Initial Link Configuration Parameters Overview

Set Initial Link Configuration Parameters

Use the following procedure to manually set Initial Link Configuration Parameters.

Step

Action Set Num of Links as follows: IF the URC is for Voice, Frame Relay Voice, IPBH EVDO, PPP THEN set Num of Links to 2 1 1

2 3

Set Init Unit Id to 1. Set TGC to Use to match Select the URC you want to update.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 84

CREATE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS, Continued


Set Initial Link Configuration Parameters (continued)
Step Action Set the following parameters as directed: IF the URC is for THEN a) Set Link Type/App Id to Frame Relay. b) Set DLCI to the CDM#. Examples: DLCI is 1 for Primary URC1, DLCI is 2 for Primary URC2, DLCI is 5 for Growth 1 URC1. c) Set MAXW field to 8. a) b) c) d) Voice, IPBH -orEVDO, PPP Set Link Type/App Id to PPP. Set Data Rate to 64K. Set Max Interfaces to 2. Set Time Slot Mask to 0x00ffffff for T1 or 0xfffffffe for E1 with CCS. e) Uncheck Data Invert. (The customer may specify a different setting for Data Invert.) f) Set Mode to NONE for Voice-IPBH or DHCP for EVDO-PPP. g) Check all 8 Selected TGMs.

Voice, Frame Relay

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 85

CREATE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS, Continued


Set Initial Link Configuration Parameters (continued)
Step Action Proceed as directed by the table below: IF backhaul type is Voice, Frame Relay Voice, IPBH EVDO, PPP THEN a) Repeat Steps 3-4 with Init Unit ID set to 2. b) Proceed with Step 6 when Step a is complete. Proceed with Step 6 Proceed with Step 6

6 7 8 9

Click on Apply from the Configure Boot Memory Parameters window. Verify Backplane Successfully Updated (text appears above the Apply Button). Repeat all procedures in this Appendix for each equipped URC. Go to FINAL PROCEDURES on page 77.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 86

DEFAULT T1/E1 SETTINGS


Default T1/E1 Optioning The table below describes the default T1/E1 settings when recalling files bundled with RMT. The factory also uses the same default settings for T1 while all factory default E1 settings use CCS Signaling. The signaling for E1 must be CCS for all IP backhaul enabled cells.

Table 10: XML File T1/E1 TGM Default Settings

Field Name Daisy Chain Mode Line Coding Framing Mode Signaling Rate Long/Short Haul Line Build Out / Equalization Time Slot Mask

Default T1 Values Disabled T1 B8ZS ESF CCS/Clear Channel 64K Long 0dB 0x00ffffff

Default E1 Values for CCS Disabled E1 HDB3 NoCRC CCS/Clear Channel 64K Long E1 LH 0xfffffffe

Default E1 Values for CAS (see Note) Disabled E1 HDB3 NoCRC CAS/Channel Associated Signaling 64K Long E1 LH 0xfffefffe

NOTE: CAS is not supported for E1 IPBH cells.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 87

RECORD VERSION UPGRADE


Record Version Upgrade Procedure Use the following procedure to upgrade Record Version information for a controller.

Step

Action Click Advanced at the bottom of the Configure Boot Memory Parameter window. The following window appears:

2 3 4

Change Record Version to 4 Click Apply in the Advanced Serial Memory Record Parameters window. Click Yes in the Are you Sure?? window.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 88

RECORD VERSION UPGRADE, Continued


Record Version Upgrade Procedure (continued)
Step Action Click Cancel to close the Advanced Serial Memory Records Parameter window. Click Yes in the Upgrade NFD Record window.

5 6

Determine the next procedure to execute. Do not exit the Configure Boot Memory Parameter window. IF the CDM type is Voice EVDO THEN Return to Step 4 of Configure Voice Trunk Group Controller Parameters on page 59. Return to Step 4 of Configure EVDO Trunk Group Controller Parameters on page 71.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 89

BACKPLANE SERIAL NUMBER AND MAC ADDRESS


Backplane Identification Use the following procedure to view the frame backplane serial number (BPSN) and controller MAC addresses. NOTE: The BPSN and MAC address are required information for cells using IP backhaul. This information will be populated in the btseqp form for each URC. Step 1 2 Action Make an Offline or Online RMT connection to the cells first controller (URC). Click Config Cell Boot Memory Parameters BPSN/MAC Addresses from the RMT Connection Screen. The following Configure BPSN and MAC Address window appears:

Figure 22: BPSN and MAC Address


NOTES: The BPSN must be identical for all equipped controllers and displayed regardless of which controller is connected to RMT. The MAC Address must be unique for each equipped controller. The MAC Address is only visible for the controller connected to RMT. You will need to connect to each equipped controller to view each unique MAC Address. 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for each equipped controller.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 90

BACKPLANE DESCRIPTOR FILES AND PARAMETERS


RMT 31.0 Job Aid Section JA300 GENERAL INFORMATION
Purpose This section describes procedures for verifying and setting the backplane descriptor files and parameters. Unit Type Descriptor (UTD) backplane parameters and the Tower Top Low Noise Amplifer (TTLNA) files and inventory are covered in the following sections. The descriptor files are verified and set using RMT. These files are accessed via the RMT pull-down menu (as shown below).

In conjunction with the on-line RMT HELP menu, the following procedures will aid the user in verifying and setting these backplane parameters. The following procedures are provided in this section: Section/Description

Section JA310 - Verifying and Setting the Unit Type Descriptor on page 93 Section JA320 - Verifying and Setting the Tower Top Low Noise Amplifier Descritor and Inventory on page 175

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 91

This page intentionally left blank.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 92

Backplane Descriptor Files and Parameters


Section JA310 - Verifying and Setting the Unit Type Descriptor GENERAL
Section Description This section describes procedures for verifying and setting the Unit Type Descriptor (UTD) for the following platforms: 9218/9228 Base Station Macro 9216/9226 Base Station Compact 9223 Base Station Ultra-Compact 9224 Base Station Sub-Compact 9224 Base Station Sub-Compact EN 9228 Base Station Macro IN 9228 Base Station Macro LP 9218/9228 Macro HD 9228 Macro MCPA-D 9228 Macro MCPA-HD 9228 Macro MCPA-M4

The UTDs are verified and set using the Remote Maintenance Tool (RMT). It is assumed that the cell equipment has already been integrated and is in-service, meaning the backplane parameter programming was verified and completed at the time of cell integration and commissioning. The procedures specified herein are to be performed if problems occur during the operation of the cell equipment or when updates need to be made to the existing UTD. The UTD parameters can be reviewed with the cell site either on-line or off-line via the RMT connection. It is highly recommended that whenever changes or updates are made to the backplane parameters that the cell is removed from service. Note: When creating or modifying .xml files always save a copy of the file to the appropriate directory folder on your computer. Configuration Aid Document (CA 100) The procedures outlined in this section are supported with the .xml files packaged in the Configuration Aid (CA 100) document. The CA 100 document is available through the AlcatelLucent Customer Information Center (CIC) see CONFIGURATION AID (CA100) INSTALLATION on page 14 for information on accessing and loading this document. The CA 100 document includes: The various cell configurations, Configuration overview, Schematics, Backplane programming information, Applicable RF power calibration sections, and Packaged XML files.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 93

PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES
Facilities Disconnection The connection between the switch and the cell should be removed prior to performing RMT standalone testing. Step 1 Action Refer to the FACILITIES DISCONNECTION procedures on page 52 to remove the cell from service.

Connect with RMT

Use the following procedure to connect to the controller (URC) with RMT.

Step 1 2

Action Connect to the cell controller (URC) with RMT. Refer to the RMT INITIALIZATION procedures on page 17. The updates described in this section can be performed while connected to the cell with RMT and using the Boot Generic. It is not necessary to boot to a callprocessing generic to perform the procedures defined in this section. These procedures can also be performed using an on-line RMT connection. Proceed with UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTOR CONFIGURATION on the next page.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 94

UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTOR CONFIGURATION


General This section describes the procedures to save, recall and apply the UTD (Unit Type Descriptor) files using the Remote Maintenance Tool (RMT). The procedures specified herein are to be performed if problems occur during the maintenance process of the cell equipment or when updates are needed to be made to the existing backplane parameters (i.e. during carrier growth, radio growth, or cabinet reconfiguration scenarios). NOTE: Typically, the UTD .xml files packaged with the CA100 document (see Configuration Aid Document (CA 100) on page 93) will be used for all configurations. Only use the manual update processes defined in this section to adjust the UTD when the exact cell configuration is not available in the CA100 document. The UTD is set in the factory based on the cabinet configuration and equipage. If problems are experienced during integration or maintenance and the UTD is suspect and/or when field changes are made to the cabinet, use the following procedures to verify, update, create and/or save the UTD information. NOTE: The UTD must be the same for all equipped controllers in the frame (i.e. both Voice and EVDO controllers must have the same UTD).

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 95

UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTOR CONFIGURATION, Continued


Unit Type Descriptor Update Processes Follow steps and procedures below to: Open the existing UTD Save existing UTD XML file Recall a new UTD XML file Apply a new UTD XML file Step 1 2 Connect with RMT. Click on Config Cell Unit Type Descriptor and Set the desired URC number in field Select the URC you want to update. Action

Go to Save UTD XML File on the next page.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 96

UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTOR CONFIGURATION, Continued


Save UTD XML File Follow procedure below to save an existing UTD XML file.

Step 1 2 3 Connect with RMT.

Action

Click Save under the Configuration File box. Click the down arrow and select the Local Disk(C :) drive.

Create a new folder by clicking the Create New Folder Icon

Type a name for the folder and hit Enter. This folder can then be used to store all of the UTD, UCR, and TDU xml files that are saved. For example you can name the folder XML Files. Double Click the folder just created in Step 4. Enter the desired filename in the File name box. Example Cell 350 UTD.xml

6 7

8 9 10

Click Save in the Save As window. After the file is saved a window appears The operation completed successfully. Click OK in this window. Go to How to Recall a UTD XML File on the next page.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 97

UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTOR CONFIGURATION, Continued


How to Recall a UTD XML File The procedure below is used during field installation upgrades with the XML files that are packaged with the CA 100 document or with a known good XML file.

Step 1 2 Connect with RMT.

Action

Open the Configure Unit Type Descriptor window (if it is not already open) from the RMT main menu select: Config Cell Unit Type Descriptor

3 4 5

Set the desired URC number in the field Select the URC you want to update. Click on Recall under the Configuration File heading. Check that desired configuration is covered under the CA 100 document and / or you have a required XML file. IF ... A file is available No file is available THEN ... Go to step 6. Go to MANUAL EDIT OF UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTOR on page 100.

Select the desired UTD XML file for the cell configuration and select OPEN. NOTE: Below is an example of the CA 100 file directory.

Go to Apply the UTD to all URCs in the Frame on the next page.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 98

UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTOR CONFIGURATION, Continued


Apply the UTD to all URCs in the Frame Use the steps below to apply the UTD to all equipped URCs.

Step 1 2

Action With the desired UTD selected and opened per the previous steps, click Apply at the bottom of the Configure Unit Type Descriptor window. Inspect the Synchronized EEPROM Write window and verify all equipped URCs including the spare (URC 4) if equipped have a check mark.

Click Confirm. RMT will update all the selected URCs. NOTE: When all URCs have been updated, the Status window will display Finished writing Unit Type Descriptor Record. Click Cancel in the Configure Unit Type Descriptor window.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 99

MANUAL EDIT OF UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTOR


Overview of How to Manually Edit or Create a Unit Type Descriptor Below is an overview of procedures of how to manually edit or create a Unit type Descriptor XML file. This procedure can be used by an experienced installer to edit and/or create the UTD XML file.

Stage 1 2 Connect with RMT. Access the UTD screen, select:

Description

Config Cell Unit Type Descriptor 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Set the desired URC number in field Select the URC you want to update. Save the existing UTD configuration file. See Save UTD XML File on page 97. Delete any existing entries by pressing the Delete this entry button and Click Yes in the Confirm delete window. Repeat Step 5 until ALL entries are deleted. Confirm that the Total number of units described is 0. Click on Add New Entry under Append New Entry Create new entries based on the cabinet configuration. Upon completing all entries, click Apply. Save the new UTD configuration file to laptop. To help simplify the manual process of editing and/or creating a new UTD, this section has been split between the following cabinet configurations. Proceed as directed by the table below: IF the cell is a 9218/9228 Base Station Macro OR 9216/9226 Base Station Compact OR 9224 Base Station SubCompact OR 9224 Base Station SubCompact EN OR 9228 Base Station Macro IN OR 9228 Base Station Macro LP. 9218/9228 Macro HD OR 9228 Macro MCPA-D OR 9228 Macro MCPA-HD OR 9228 Macro MCPA-M4. THEN Go to the UTD FOR 9218/9228 MACRO, 9216/9226 COMPACT, 9222 MICRO, 9223 ULTRA-COMPACT, 9224 SUBCOMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT EN, 9228 MACRO EN, 9228 MACRO IN AND 9228 MACRO LP procedures on the next page.

Go to the 9218/9228 MACRO HD CELLS AND 9228 MACRO MCPA CONFIGURATIONS INCLUDING 9228 MACRO MCPA-D/HD/M4 UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTORS (UTD) procedures on page 141.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 100

UTD FOR 9218/9228 MACRO, 9216/9226 COMPACT, 9222 MICRO, 9223 ULTRA-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT EN, 9228 MACRO EN, 9228 MACRO IN AND 9228 MACRO LP
UTD Edit and Create Procedures This section describes the procedures to manually edit and create the UTD (Unit Type Descriptor) for CDMA 9218 / 9228 Macro, 9216 / 9226 Compact, 9222 Micro, 9223 UltraCompact, 9224 Sub-Compact, 9224 Sub-Compact EN, 9228 Macro IN, and 9228 Macro LP using the Remote Maintenance Tool (RMT). Follow the procedure below to add the amplifier entry to the unit type descriptor. Step 1 Connect with RMT. NOTE: Beginning with RMT 30, saved XML files can be viewed/edited without connecting to the cell controller. From the RMT main menu, open the Edit Path Map screen by selecting Config Edit Path Map Unit Type Descriptor. Use the Recall button to select the file to view/edit. 2 From the RMT main menu, open the Configure Unit Type Descriptor screen by selecting Config Cell Unit Type Descriptor Action

Amplifier Entry

Figure 23: Selecting UTD

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 101

UTD FOR 9218/9228 MACRO, 9216/9226 COMPACT, 9222 MICRO, 9223 ULTRA-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT EN, 9228 MACRO EN, 9228 MACRO IN AND 9228 MACRO LP, Continued
Amplifier Entry (continued)
Step 3 Action Click Add Entry. In the new entry box that appears do the following.

Figure 24: Unit Type Descriptor Screen (example)


4 Click Add Entry. NOTE: The new entry box will appear.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 102

UTD FOR 9218/9228 MACRO, 9216/9226 COMPACT, 9222 MICRO, 9223 ULTRA-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT EN, 9228 MACRO EN, 9228 MACRO IN AND 9228 MACRO LP, Continued
Amplifier Entry (continued)
Step 5 Action Select Transmit Amplifier for the Unit Type line.

Figure 25: Unit Type Field Selecting Transmit Amplifier Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 103

UTD FOR 9218/9228 MACRO, 9216/9226 COMPACT, 9222 MICRO, 9223 ULTRA-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT EN, 9228 MACRO EN, 9228 MACRO IN AND 9228 MACRO LP, Continued
Amplifier Entry (continued)
Step 6 Action Select Number of Units in the center box of the Logical Unit Number/Number of Units line.

Figure 26: Logical Unit Number/Number of Units Field Selecting Number of Units Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 104

UTD FOR 9218/9228 MACRO, 9216/9226 COMPACT, 9222 MICRO, 9223 ULTRA-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT EN, 9228 MACRO EN, 9228 MACRO IN AND 9228 MACRO LP, Continued
Amplifier Entry (continued)
Step 7 Action Enter 18 in the last box of the Logical Unit Number/Number of Units line.

Figure 27: Number of Amplifier Units Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 105

UTD FOR 9218/9228 MACRO, 9216/9226 COMPACT, 9222 MICRO, 9223 ULTRA-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT EN, 9228 MACRO EN, 9228 MACRO IN AND 9228 MACRO LP, Continued
Amplifier Entry (continued)
Step 8 Action Enter 0x0 in the Additional Information line.

Figure 28: Additional Information Field Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 106

UTD FOR 9218/9228 MACRO, 9216/9226 COMPACT, 9222 MICRO, 9223 ULTRA-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT EN, 9228 MACRO EN, 9228 MACRO IN AND 9228 MACRO LP, Continued
Amplifier Entry (continued)
Step 9 For the Unit Type Descriptor line IF the cell is equipped with amplifiers not equipped with amplifiers THEN select Modcell OneBTS I2C, RC/V, kc1, kc2, kc3, kp1, kp2, kp3, clam, plam Null AMP (software stub) Action

Figure 29: Unit Type Descriptor Field Selecting an Amplifier Type Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 107

UTD FOR 9218/9228 MACRO, 9216/9226 COMPACT, 9222 MICRO, 9223 ULTRA-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT EN, 9228 MACRO EN, 9228 MACRO IN AND 9228 MACRO LP, Continued
Amplifier Entry (continued)
Step 10 Action Proceed to the appropriate procedure to enter filters in the UTD IF the frame is... Dual Band (PCS/AWS) frame a primary frame equipped with filters a primary frame NOT equipped with filters a single band class growth frame a multi-band class growth frame a 9228 Macro LP with no filters THEN go to... UTD FOR DUAL BAND (PCS/AWS) FRAMES on page 134. Filter Entry for a Primary Frame on page 109. Filter Entry for a Single Band Class Growth Frame on page 114. Filter Entry for a Single Band Class Growth Frame on page 114. Filter Entry for a Multi Band Class Growth Frame on page 119. FINAL PROCEDURES on page 172

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 108

UTD FOR 9218/9228 MACRO, 9216/9226 COMPACT, 9222 MICRO, 9223 ULTRA-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT EN, 9228 MACRO EN, 9228 MACRO IN AND 9228 MACRO LP, Continued
Filter Entry for a Primary Frame Follow the procedure below to add the filter entry to the unit type descriptor.

Step 1 2

Action Click Add Entry. NOTE: The new Entry box will appear. Select Filter Panel in the Unit Type line.

Figure 30: Unit Type Field Selecting Filter Panel Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 109

UTD FOR 9218/9228 MACRO, 9216/9226 COMPACT, 9222 MICRO, 9223 ULTRA-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT EN, 9228 MACRO EN, 9228 MACRO IN AND 9228 MACRO LP, Continued
Filter Entry for a Primary Frame (continued)
Step 3 Action Select Number of Units in the center box of the Logical Unit Number/Number of Units line.

Figure 31: Logical Unit Number/Number of Units Field Selecting Number Of Units Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 110

UTD FOR 9218/9228 MACRO, 9216/9226 COMPACT, 9222 MICRO, 9223 ULTRA-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT EN, 9228 MACRO EN, 9228 MACRO IN AND 9228 MACRO LP, Continued
Filter Entry for a Primary Frame (continued)
Step 4 Action For the last box of the Logical Unit Number/Number of Units line. IF the frame is ... 9228 Macro Six Sector 9228 Macro LP with filters 9228 Macro IN 9216 Compact - Omni 9216 Compact - IBS all other frames THEN enter... 12 12 12 2 2 6

Figure 32: Number of Filter Units Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 111

UTD FOR 9218/9228 MACRO, 9216/9226 COMPACT, 9222 MICRO, 9223 ULTRA-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT EN, 9228 MACRO EN, 9228 MACRO IN AND 9228 MACRO LP, Continued
Filter Entry for a Primary Frame (continued)
Step 5 Action Enter 0x0 in the Additional Information line.

Figure 33: Additional Information Line Entering 0X0 Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 112

UTD FOR 9218/9228 MACRO, 9216/9226 COMPACT, 9222 MICRO, 9223 ULTRA-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT EN, 9228 MACRO EN, 9228 MACRO IN AND 9228 MACRO LP, Continued
Filter Entry for a Primary Frame (continued)
Step 6 For the Unit Type Descriptor line: IF the frame has Modcell 3.0 filters Dual Duplex filters Dual Triplex filters THEN select Modcell hybrid I2C/Ibutton interface Dual OneBTS Filter Panel Dual OneBTS Filter Panel Action

Figure 34: Unit Type Descriptor Selecting a Filter Panel Type


7 Proceed to the appropriate procedure. IF the frame is... a 9216 Compact Distributed configuration any other primary configuration THEN go to... Radio Entries for 9216 Compact Distributed Configurations on page 129. Go to FINAL PROCEDURES on page 172.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 113

UTD FOR 9218/9228 MACRO, 9216/9226 COMPACT, 9222 MICRO, 9223 ULTRA-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT EN, 9228 MACRO EN, 9228 MACRO IN AND 9228 MACRO LP, Continued
Filter Entry for a Single Band Class Growth Frame Follow the procedure below to add the filter entry to the unit type descriptor.

Step 1 2

Action Click Add Entry. NOTE: The new Entry box will appear. Select Filter Panel for the Unit Type line.

Figure 35: Unit Type Field Selecting Filter Panel Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 114

UTD FOR 9218/9228 MACRO, 9216/9226 COMPACT, 9222 MICRO, 9223 ULTRA-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT EN, 9228 MACRO EN, 9228 MACRO IN AND 9228 MACRO LP, Continued
Filter Entry for a Single Band Class Growth Frame (continued)
Step 3 Action Select Logical Unit Number in the center box of the Logical Unit Number/Number of Units line.

Figure 36: Logical Unit Number/Number of Units Field Selecting Logical Unit Number Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 115

UTD FOR 9218/9228 MACRO, 9216/9226 COMPACT, 9222 MICRO, 9223 ULTRA-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT EN, 9228 MACRO EN, 9228 MACRO IN AND 9228 MACRO LP, Continued
Filter Entry for a Single Band Class Growth Frame (continued)
Step 4 Action Enter 1 for the last box of the Logical Unit Number/Number of Units line. NOTE: The number entered in this box will be incremented for each filter entry. (2,3,4,5, and 6)

Figure 37: Last box in Logical Unit Number/Number of Units Inserting an incremented number Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 116

UTD FOR 9218/9228 MACRO, 9216/9226 COMPACT, 9222 MICRO, 9223 ULTRA-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT EN, 9228 MACRO EN, 9228 MACRO IN AND 9228 MACRO LP, Continued
Filter Entry for a Single Band Class Growth Frame (continued)
Step 5 For the Additional Information line: IF the frame is... equipped with filters or simulators THEN ... i) Click Filter Panel Location Action

Figure 38: Filter Panel Location Screen


ii) For the Digital Shelf: IF the frame is... Growth 1 Growth 2 Growth 3 THEN select... 2 3 4

iii) For the Filter Shelf select 1. iv) For the Filter Number select 1. NOTE: The number entered in this box will be incremented for each filter entry. (2,3,4,5, and 6) v) Click OK in the Filter Panel Location Window vi) Go to step 6 not equipped with filters or simulators i) Enter 0x1 NOTE: The number entered in this box will be incremented for each filter entry. (0x2, 0x3, 0x4, 0x5, and 0x6) ii) Go to step 6

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 117

UTD FOR 9218/9228 MACRO, 9216/9226 COMPACT, 9222 MICRO, 9223 ULTRA-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT EN, 9228 MACRO EN, 9228 MACRO IN AND 9228 MACRO LP, Continued
Filter Entry for a Single Band Class Growth Frame (continued)
Step 6 For the Unit Type Descriptor line IF the growth frame has Modcell 3.0 filters or simulators Dual Duplex filters Dual Triplex filters no filters or a CLGC hub a CLGC hub and the Primary frame has Dual Duplex filters a CLGC hub and the Primary frame has Modcell 3.0 filters THEN select Modcell hybrid I2C/Ibutton interface Dual OneBTS Filter Panel Dual OneBTS Filter Panel Null Filter Panel Dual OneBTS Filter Panel Modcell hybrid I2C/Ibutton interface Action

Figure 39: Unit Type Descriptor Field Selecting Filter Panel Type

7 8

Repeat steps 1 6 to insert 6 filter panel entries Go to FINAL PROCEDURES on page 172.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 118

UTD FOR 9218/9228 MACRO, 9216/9226 COMPACT, 9222 MICRO, 9223 ULTRA-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT EN, 9228 MACRO EN, 9228 MACRO IN AND 9228 MACRO LP, Continued
Filter Entry for a Multi Band Class Growth Frame Follow the procedure below to add the filter entry to the unit type descriptor.

Step 1 2

Action Click Add Entry. NOTE: The new Entry box will appear. Select Filter Panel for the Unit Type line.

Figure 40: Unit Type Field Selecting Filter Panel Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 119

UTD FOR 9218/9228 MACRO, 9216/9226 COMPACT, 9222 MICRO, 9223 ULTRA-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT EN, 9228 MACRO EN, 9228 MACRO IN AND 9228 MACRO LP, Continued
Filter Entry for a Multi Band Class Growth Frame (continued)
Step 3 Action Select Logical Unit Number in the center box of the Logical Unit Number/Number of Units line.

Figure 41: Logical Unit Number/Number of Units Field Selecting Logical Unit Number Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 120

UTD FOR 9218/9228 MACRO, 9216/9226 COMPACT, 9222 MICRO, 9223 ULTRA-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT EN, 9228 MACRO EN, 9228 MACRO IN AND 9228 MACRO LP, Continued
Filter Entry for a Multi Band Class Growth Frame (continued)
Step 4 Action Enter 1 in the last box of the Logical Unit Number/Number of Units line. NOTE: The number entered in this box will be incremented for each filter entry. (2,3,4,5, and 6)

Figure 42: Last box in Logical Unit Number/Number of Units Inserting an incremented number Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 121

UTD FOR 9218/9228 MACRO, 9216/9226 COMPACT, 9222 MICRO, 9223 ULTRA-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT EN, 9228 MACRO EN, 9228 MACRO IN AND 9228 MACRO LP, Continued
Filter Entry for a Multi Band Class Growth Frame (continued)
Step 5 Action Enter 0x1onthe Additional Information line. NOTE: The number entered in this box will be incremented for each filter entry. (0x2, 0x3, 0x4, 0x5, and 0x6)

Figure 43: Additional Information Field Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 122

UTD FOR 9218/9228 MACRO, 9216/9226 COMPACT, 9222 MICRO, 9223 ULTRA-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT EN, 9228 MACRO EN, 9228 MACRO IN AND 9228 MACRO LP, Continued
Filter Entry for a Multi Band Class Growth Frame (continued)
Step 6 Action Select Null Filter Panel on the Unit Type Descriptor line.

Figure 44: Unit Type Descriptor Field Selecting Null Filter Panel

Repeat steps 1 6 adding in filter panel logical unit entries 1 6.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 123

UTD FOR 9218/9228 MACRO, 9216/9226 COMPACT, 9222 MICRO, 9223 ULTRA-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT EN, 9228 MACRO EN, 9228 MACRO IN AND 9228 MACRO LP, Continued
Filter Entry for a Multi Band Class Growth Frame (continued)
Step 8 9 Action Click Add Entry. NOTE: The new Entry box will appear. Select Filter Panel for the Unit Type line.

Figure 45: Unit Type Field Selecting Filter Panel Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 124

UTD FOR 9218/9228 MACRO, 9216/9226 COMPACT, 9222 MICRO, 9223 ULTRA-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT EN, 9228 MACRO EN, 9228 MACRO IN AND 9228 MACRO LP, Continued
Filter Entry for a Multi Band Class Growth Frame (continued)
Step 10 Action Select Logical Unit Number in the center box of the Logical Unit Number/Number of Units line.

Figure 46: Logical Unit Number/Number of Units Field Selecting Logical Unit Number Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 125

UTD FOR 9218/9228 MACRO, 9216/9226 COMPACT, 9222 MICRO, 9223 ULTRA-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT EN, 9228 MACRO EN, 9228 MACRO IN AND 9228 MACRO LP, Continued
Filter Entry for a Multi Band Class Growth Frame (continued)
Step 11 Action Enter 7 in the last box of the Logical Unit Number/Number of Units line. NOTE: The number entered in this box will be incremented for each filter entry. (8, 9, 10, 11, and 12)

Figure 47: Last box in Logical Unit Number/Number of Units Inserting an incremented number Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 126

UTD FOR 9218/9228 MACRO, 9216/9226 COMPACT, 9222 MICRO, 9223 ULTRA-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT EN, 9228 MACRO EN, 9228 MACRO IN AND 9228 MACRO LP, Continued
Filter Entry for a Multi Band Class Growth Frame (continued)
Step 12 Click Filter Panel Location Action

Figure 48: Filter Panel Location Window


Select the Digital Shelf number based on the table below: IF the frame is... Growth 1 Growth 2 Growth 3 THEN select... 2 3 4

13

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 127

UTD FOR 9218/9228 MACRO, 9216/9226 COMPACT, 9222 MICRO, 9223 ULTRA-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT EN, 9228 MACRO EN, 9228 MACRO IN AND 9228 MACRO LP, Continued
Filter Entry for a Multi Band Class Growth Frame (continued)
Step 14 15 Action Select 1 for the Filter Shelf in the Filter Panel Location window. Select 1 for the Filter Number in the Filter Panel Location window. NOTE: The number entered in this box will be incremented for each filter entry. (2,3,4,5, and 6) Click OK in the Filter Panel Location Window Select Modcell hybrid I2C/Ibutton interface for the Unit Type Descriptor line.

16 17

Figure 49: Unit Type Descriptor Selecting Amp Type Modcell hybrid I2C/Ibutton interface

18 19

Repeat steps 8 17 adding in filter panel logical unit entries 7 12. Go to FINAL PROCEDURES on page 172.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 128

UTD FOR 9218/9228 MACRO, 9216/9226 COMPACT, 9222 MICRO, 9223 ULTRA-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT EN, 9228 MACRO EN, 9228 MACRO IN AND 9228 MACRO LP, Continued
Radio Entries for 9216 Compact Distributed Configurations Follow the procedure below to add radio entries to the unit type descriptor. NOTE: Only used for 9216 Compact Distributed cells with remote sectors.

Step 1 2

Action Click Add Entry. NOTE: The new Entry box will appear. Select Radio on the Unit Type line.

Figure 50: Unit Type Field Selecting Radio Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 129

UTD FOR 9218/9228 MACRO, 9216/9226 COMPACT, 9222 MICRO, 9223 ULTRA-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT EN, 9228 MACRO EN, 9228 MACRO IN AND 9228 MACRO LP, Continued
Radio Entries for 9216 Compact Distributed Configurations (continued)
Step 3 Action Select Logical Unit Number in the center box of the Logical Unit Number/Number of Units line.

Figure 51: Logical Unit Number/Number of Units Field Selecting Logical Unit Number Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 130

UTD FOR 9218/9228 MACRO, 9216/9226 COMPACT, 9222 MICRO, 9223 ULTRA-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT EN, 9228 MACRO EN, 9228 MACRO IN AND 9228 MACRO LP, Continued
Radio Entries for 9216 Compact Distributed Configurations (continued)
Step 4 Action Enter 1 in the last box of the Logical Unit Number/Number of Units line. NOTE: The number entered in this box will be incremented for each radio entry (2, and 3).

Figure 52: Last box in Logical Unit Number/Number of Units Inserting an incremented number Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 131

UTD FOR 9218/9228 MACRO, 9216/9226 COMPACT, 9222 MICRO, 9223 ULTRA-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT EN, 9228 MACRO EN, 9228 MACRO IN AND 9228 MACRO LP, Continued
Radio Entries for 9216 Compact Distributed Configurations (continued)
Step 5 Action Enter 0x0 in the Additional Information line.

Figure 53: Additional Information Line Entering 0X0 Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 132

UTD FOR 9218/9228 MACRO, 9216/9226 COMPACT, 9222 MICRO, 9223 ULTRA-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT, 9224 SUB-COMPACT EN, 9228 MACRO EN, 9228 MACRO IN AND 9228 MACRO LP, Continued
Radio Entries for 9216 Compact Distributed Configurations (continued)
Step 6 For the Unit Type Descriptor line: IF the radio slot has a radio CFM (Common Fiber Module) THEN select Generic OneBTS/Modcell 4.0 multicarrier OneBTS CFMA Radio for Remote RFU) Action

Figure 54: Unit Type Descriptor Field Selecting Radio Type

7 8

Repeat steps 1 6 adding radio logical unit entries 1 3. Go to FINAL PROCEDURES on page 172.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 133

UTD FOR DUAL BAND (PCS/AWS) FRAMES


Filter UTD for Dual Band (PCS/AWS) Use the following procedure to identify the Dual Band (PCS/AWS) configuration and build the filter portion of the UTD for the specific AWS dual band configuration.

Step 1

Action Proceed to the appropriate procedure to enter Dual Band (PCS/AWS) filters in the UTD. IF the Dual Band configuration is a ... Single Frame line up (9228 Macro) Classic Modcell 9228 Macro 9218 Macro 9228 Macro 9228 Macro 9228 Macro AND configured with ----THEN go to... Single Frame Line Up (9228 Macro) on page 135. 2 Frame Line Up (Classic Modcell 9228 Macro) on page 136. 2 Frame Line Up (9218 Macro 9228 Macro) on page 138. 2 Frame Line Up (9228 Macro 9228 Macro) with Filters only in Growth Frame on page 138. 2 Frame Line Up (9228 Macro 9228 Macro) 4-6 Sectors on page 139.

Filters in both frames

Filters only in Growth Frame

9228 Macro 9228 Macro

Filters in both frames (6 Sector)

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 134

UTD FOR DUAL BAND (PCS/AWS) FRAMES, CONTINUED


Single Frame Line Up (9228 Macro) Modify the filter portion of the UTD file to match the following when working with a Dual Band (PCS/AWS) line up in a single 9228 Macro frame.

Entry #2 Unit Type Number of Units Additional Information Unit Type Descriptor

Filter Panel 6 0x0 Dual OneBTS Filter Panel

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 135

UTD FOR DUAL BAND (PCS/AWS) FRAMES, CONTINUED


2 Frame Line Up (Classic Modcell 9228 Macro) Modify the filter portion of the UTD file to match the following when working with a Dual Band (PCS/AWS) line up using a Classic Modcell 1.0/2.0/3.0 Primary Frame and a 9228 Macro growth frame. The following UTD filter entries must be applied to the 9228 Macro Growth Frame. Entry #2 Unit Type Logical Unit Number Additional Information Unit Type Descriptor Entry #3 Unit Type Logical Unit Number Additional Information Unit Type Descriptor Entry #4 Unit Type Logical Unit Number Additional Information Unit Type Descriptor Entry #5 Unit Type Logical Unit Number Additional Information Unit Type Descriptor Entry #6 Unit Type Logical Unit Number Additional Information Unit Type Descriptor Entry #7 Unit Type Logical Unit Number Additional Information Unit Type Descriptor DSN Filter Panel 1 0x21 Dual OneBTS Filter Panel Filter Panel 2 0x22 Dual OneBTS Filter Panel Filter Panel 3 0x23 Dual OneBTS Filter Panel Filter Panel 4 0x24 Dual OneBTS Filter Panel Filter Panel 5 0x25 Dual OneBTS Filter Panel Filter Panel 6 0x26 Dual OneBTS Filter Panel FSN FP#

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 136

UTD FOR DUAL BAND (PCS/AWS) FRAMES, CONTINUED


2 Frame Line Up (9218 Macro 9228 Macro) Modify the filter portion of the UTD file to match the following when working with a Dual Band (PCS/AWS) line up using a 9218 Macro Primary Frame and a 9228 Macro growth frame. The following UTD filter entries must be applied to the 9228 Macro Growth Frame.

(This feature is not available at this time and will be released at a future date.)

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 137

UTD FOR DUAL BAND (PCS/AWS) FRAMES, CONTINUED


2 Frame Line Up (9228 Macro 9228 Macro) with Filters only in Growth Frame Modify the filter portion of the UTD file to match the following when working with a Dual Band (PCS/AWS) line up using a 9228 Macro Primary Frame and a 9228 Macro Growth Frame. The following UTD filter entries must be applied to BOTH frames. Entry #2 Unit Type Logical Unit Number Additional Information Unit Type Descriptor Entry #3 Unit Type Logical Unit Number Additional Information Unit Type Descriptor Entry #4 Unit Type Logical Unit Number Additional Information Unit Type Descriptor Entry #5 Unit Type Logical Unit Number Additional Information Unit Type Descriptor Entry #6 Unit Type Logical Unit Number Additional Information Unit Type Descriptor Entry #7 Unit Type Logical Unit Number Additional Information Unit Type Descriptor DSN Filter Panel 1 0x21 Dual OneBTS Filter Panel Filter Panel 2 0x22 Dual OneBTS Filter Panel Filter Panel 3 0x23 Dual OneBTS Filter Panel Filter Panel 4 0x24 Dual OneBTS Filter Panel Filter Panel 5 0x25 Dual OneBTS Filter Panel Filter Panel 6 0x26 Dual OneBTS Filter Panel FSN FP#

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 138

UTD FOR DUAL BAND (PCS/AWS) FRAMES, CONTINUED


2 Frame Line Up (9228 Macro 9228 Macro) 4-6 Sectors Modify the filter portion of the UTD file to match the following when working with a Dual Band (PCS/AWS) line up using a Primary 9228 Macro frame and a Growth 9228 Macro frame equipped with 4-6 Sectors. The following 12 UTD filter entries must be applied to BOTH frames. Entry #2 Unit Type Logical Unit Number Additional Information Unit Type Descriptor Entry #3 Unit Type Logical Unit Number Additional Information Unit Type Descriptor Entry #4 Unit Type Logical Unit Number Additional Information Unit Type Descriptor Entry #5 Unit Type Logical Unit Number Additional Information Unit Type Descriptor Entry #6 Unit Type Logical Unit Number Additional Information Unit Type Descriptor Entry #7 Unit Type Logical Unit Number Additional Information Unit Type Descriptor Entry #8 Unit Type Logical Unit Number Additional Information Unit Type Descriptor Entry #9 Unit Type Logical Unit Number Additional Information Unit Type Descriptor DSN Filter Panel 1 0x21 Dual OneBTS Filter Panel Filter Panel 2 0x22 Dual OneBTS Filter Panel Filter Panel 3 0x23 Dual OneBTS Filter Panel Filter Panel 4 0x24 Dual OneBTS Filter Panel Filter Panel 5 0x25 Dual OneBTS Filter Panel Filter Panel 6 0x26 Dual OneBTS Filter Panel Filter Panel 7 0x7 Dual OneBTS Filter Panel Filter Panel 8 0x8 Dual OneBTS Filter Panel FSN FP#

(Table continued on next page)

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 139

UTD FOR DUAL BAND (PCS/AWS) FRAMES, CONTINUED


2 Frame Line Up (9228 Macro 9228 Macro) 4-6 Sectors (continued)

Entry #10 Unit Type Logical Unit Number Additional Information Unit Type Descriptor Entry #11 Unit Type Logical Unit Number Additional Information Unit Type Descriptor Entry #12 Unit Type Logical Unit Number Additional Information Unit Type Descriptor Entry #13 Unit Type Logical Unit Number Additional Information Unit Type Descriptor

DSN Filter Panel 9 0x9 Dual OneBTS Filter Panel Filter Panel 10 0xA Dual OneBTS Filter Panel Filter Panel 11 0xB Dual OneBTS Filter Panel Filter Panel 12 0xC Dual OneBTS Filter Panel

FSN

FP#

10

11

12

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 140

9218/9228 MACRO HD CELLS AND 9228 MACRO MCPA CONFIGURATIONS INCLUDING 9228 MACRO MCPA-D/HD/M4 UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTORS (UTD)
UTD Edit and Create Procedures for HD/ MCPA Cells This section describes the procedures to manually edit and create the UTD (Unit Type Descriptor) for CDMA 9218 / 9228 Macro HD cells and 9228 Macro MCPA-D/HD/M4 frames using the Remote Maintenance Tool (RMT). Step 1 2 Connect with RMT. From the RMT main menu, open the Configure Unit Type Descriptor screen by selecting Config Cell Unit Type Descriptor Action

Figure 55: Unit Type Descriptor Screen (example)


3 4 5 Delete any existing entries by pressing the Delete this entry button and Click Yes in the Confirm delete window. Repeat Step 3 until ALL entries are deleted. Confirm that the Total number of units described is 0. Proceed to the appropriate procedure. IF updating UTD for a ... primary frame with no OMs PCS only growth frame 9218 Macro HD Frame using LAC or using a 9228 Macro MCPA-A without filters A Base Station using a 9228 Macro MCPA with filters THEN go to ... Reference Frequency Source Entry on page 142. Transmit Amplifier Entries for Flexent Amps on page 153. Transmit Amplifier Entries for LAC or 9228 Macro MCPA-A Without Filters on page 147. UTD Entry for 9228 Macro MCPA Configs on page 164.

Continued on next page Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 141

9218/9228 MACRO HD CELLS AND 9228 MACRO MCPA CONFIGURATIONS INCLUDING 9228 MACRO MCPA-D/HD/M4 UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTORS (UTD), Continued
Reference Frequency Source Entry Follow the procedure below to add the Phantom OM entry to the unit type descriptor. NOTE: Do not use this procedure if OM is equipped in 9218 Macro HD frame. Go to Transmit Amplifier Entries for LAC or 9228 Macro MCPA-A Without Filters on page 147 or Go to Transmit Amplifier Entries for Flexent Amps on page 153 or Go to UTD Entry for 9228 Macro MCPA Configs on page 164 to add UTD for 9228 Macro MCPA-D, 9228 Macro MCPA-HD, or 9228 Macro MCPA-M4. Action Click Add Entry. In the new entry box that appears do the following. Select Reference Frequency Source for the Unit Type line.

Step 1 2

Figure 56: Unit Type Field Selecting Reference Frequency Source Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 142

9218/9228 MACRO HD CELLS AND 9228 MACRO MCPA CONFIGURATIONS INCLUDING 9228 MACRO MCPA-D/HD/M4 UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTORS (UTD), Continued
Reference Frequency Source Entry (continued)
Step 3 Action Select Logical Unit Number in the center box of the Logical Unit Number/Number of Units line.

Figure 57: Logical Unit Number/Number of Units Field Selecting Logical Unit Number

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 143

9218/9228 MACRO HD CELLS AND 9228 MACRO MCPA CONFIGURATIONS INCLUDING 9228 MACRO MCPA-D/HD/M4 UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTORS (UTD), Continued
Reference Frequency Source Entry (continued)
Step 4 Action Enter 1 in the last box of the Logical Unit Number/Number of Units line.

Figure 58: Last Box of Logical Unit Number/Number of Units Line

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 144

9218/9228 MACRO HD CELLS AND 9228 MACRO MCPA CONFIGURATIONS INCLUDING 9228 MACRO MCPA-D/HD/M4 UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTORS (UTD), Continued
Reference Frequency Source Entry (continued)
Step 5 Action Enter 0x0 in the Additional Information line.

Figure 59: Additional Information Field

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 145

9218/9228 MACRO HD CELLS AND 9228 MACRO MCPA CONFIGURATIONS INCLUDING 9228 MACRO MCPA-D/HD/M4 UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTORS (UTD), Continued
Reference Frequency Source Entry (continued)
Step 6 Action Select Phantom OM for the Unit Type Descriptor line

Figure 60: Unit Type Descriptor Field Selecting an Phantom OM


7 Proceed to Transmit Amplifier Entries for LAC or 9228 Macro MCPA-A Without Filters on the next page.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 146

9218/9228 MACRO HD CELLS AND 9228 MACRO MCPA CONFIGURATIONS INCLUDING 9228 MACRO MCPA-D/HD/M4 UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTORS (UTD), Continued
Transmit Amplifier Entries for LAC or 9228 Macro MCPA-A Without Filters Follow the procedure below to add the transmit amplifier for a LAC or 9228 Macro MCPA-A (MCPA) without filters (Series-II AIF is being used) to the unit type descriptor (UTD). NOTE: If the transmit path is using filters located in the 9228 Macro MCPA-A do NOT use this part of the procedure. Step 1 2 Action Click Add Entry. In the new entry box that appears do the following. Select Transmit Amplifier for the Unit Type line.

Figure 61: Unit Type Field Selecting Transmit Amplifier Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 147

9218/9228 MACRO HD CELLS AND 9228 MACRO MCPA CONFIGURATIONS INCLUDING 9228 MACRO MCPA-D/HD/M4 UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTORS (UTD), Continued
Transmit Amplifier Entries for LAC or 9228 Macro MCPA-A Without Filters (continued)
Step 3 Action Select Logical Unit Number in the center box of the Logical Unit Number/Number of Units line.

Figure 62: Logical Unit Number/Number of Units Field Selecting Logical Unit Number

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 148

9218/9228 MACRO HD CELLS AND 9228 MACRO MCPA CONFIGURATIONS INCLUDING 9228 MACRO MCPA-D/HD/M4 UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTORS (UTD), Continued
Transmit Amplifier Entries for LAC or 9228 Macro MCPA-A Without Filters (continued)
Step 4 Action Determine entry in the last box of the Logical Unit Number/Number of Units line from below. IF ... primary 9218 Macro HD THEN enter ... 10 NOTE: The number will be incremented for each amplifier entry (11, 12, 13, 14, 15, and 16). 30 NOTE: The number will be incremented for each amplifier entry (31, 32, 33, 34, 35, and 36). 30 NOTE: The number will be incremented for each amplifier entry (31, 32, 33, 34, 35, and 36).

primary with Flexent transmit amps installed in frame growth frame with 850 radios

Figure 63: Last Box of Logical Unit Number/Number of Units Line Showing Incremented Number Continued on next page Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 149

9218/9228 MACRO HD CELLS AND 9228 MACRO MCPA CONFIGURATIONS INCLUDING 9228 MACRO MCPA-D/HD/M4 UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTORS (UTD), Continued
Transmit Amplifier Entries for LAC or 9228 Macro MCPA-A Without Filters (continued)
Step 5 Action Determine entry in the Additional Information line from below. IF ... Primary 9218 Macro HD all others 0xA 0x1E THEN enter ...

Figure 64: Additional Information Field

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 150

9218/9228 MACRO HD CELLS AND 9228 MACRO MCPA CONFIGURATIONS INCLUDING 9228 MACRO MCPA-D/HD/M4 UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTORS (UTD), Continued
Transmit Amplifier Entries for LAC or 9228 Macro MCPA-A Without Filters (continued)
Step 6 Action Determine entry for the Unit Type Descriptor line from below. IF LAC/9228 Macro MCPA-A (MCPA) ... Supports RS-485 Does not support RS-485 THEN select ... Modcell/OneBTS, RS-422,RC/V,sc Null AMP (software stub)

Figure 65: Unit Type Descriptor Field Selecting an Amplifier Type Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 151

9218/9228 MACRO HD CELLS AND 9228 MACRO MCPA CONFIGURATIONS INCLUDING 9228 MACRO MCPA-D/HD/M4 UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTORS (UTD), Continued
Transmit Amplifier Entries for LAC or 9228 Macro MCPA-A Without Filters (continued)
Step 7 8 Action Repeat six times steps from 1 to 6 to add all the seven LAC entries. Check if 9228 Macro MCPA-A (MCPA) equipped. IF ... Yes No 9 THEN go to ... Step 9 Step 10

Steps from 1 to 6 to be repeated again seven more times to add all MCPA entries with the new Logical unit numbers starts from 20. NOTE: Steps 4, 5 and 6 have different entries outlined in the table below: On Step 1 On Step 2 On Step 3 On Step 4 On Step 5 On Step 6 Go to step 10. Click Add Entry. Select Transmit Amplifier for the Unit Type line. Select Logical Unit Number in the center box. NOTE: The number entered in this box will be incremented for each filter entry (20, 21, 22, 23, 25, 26 and 27). NOTE: In the Additional Information Line enter 0x14. NOTE: For the Unit Type Descriptor select Null Amp (software stub).

10

Proceed to the appropriate procedure. IF the frame is ... equipped with Flexent amps not equipped with Flexent amps THEN go to ... Transmit Amplifier Entries for Flexent Amps on page 153. FINAL PROCEDURES on page 172.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 152

9218/9228 MACRO HD CELLS AND 9228 MACRO MCPA CONFIGURATIONS INCLUDING 9228 MACRO MCPA-D/HD/M4 UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTORS (UTD), Continued
Transmit Amplifier Entries for Flexent Amps Follow the procedure below to add the Flexent transmit amplifiers located in the 9218/9228 Macro HD Frame to the unit type descriptor.

Step 1 2

Action Click Add Entry. In the new entry box that appears do the following. Select Transmit Amplifier for the Unit Type line.

Figure 66: Unit Type Field Selecting Transmit Amplifier Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 153

9218/9228 MACRO HD CELLS AND 9228 MACRO MCPA CONFIGURATIONS INCLUDING 9228 MACRO MCPA-D/HD/M4 UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTORS (UTD), Continued
Transmit Amplifier Entries for Flexent Amps (continued)
Step 3 Action Select Number of Units in the center box of the Logical Unit Number/Number of Units line.

Figure 67: Logical Unit Number/Number of Units Field Selecting Logical Unit Number

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 154

9218/9228 MACRO HD CELLS AND 9228 MACRO MCPA CONFIGURATIONS INCLUDING 9228 MACRO MCPA-D/HD/M4 UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTORS (UTD), Continued
Transmit Amplifier Entries for Flexent Amps (continued)
Step 4 Action Enter 18 in the last box of the Logical Unit Number/Number of Units line.

Figure 68: Last Box of Logical Unit Number/Number of Units Line

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 155

9218/9228 MACRO HD CELLS AND 9228 MACRO MCPA CONFIGURATIONS INCLUDING 9228 MACRO MCPA-D/HD/M4 UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTORS (UTD), Continued
Transmit Amplifier Entries for Flexent Amps (continued)
Step 5 Action Enter 0x0 in the Additional Information line.

Figure 69: Additional Information Field

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 156

9218/9228 MACRO HD CELLS AND 9228 MACRO MCPA CONFIGURATIONS INCLUDING 9228 MACRO MCPA-D/HD/M4 UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTORS (UTD), Continued
Transmit Amplifier Entries for Flexent Amps (continued)
Step 6 Action Select Modcell OneBTS I2C, RC/V, kc1, kc2, kc3, kp1, kp2, kp3, clam, plam for the Unit Type Descriptor line

Figure 70: Unit Type Descriptor Field Selecting an Amplifier Type


7 Proceed to Filter Panel Entries for Flexent Filters on page 158.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 157

9218/9228 MACRO HD CELLS AND 9228 MACRO MCPA CONFIGURATIONS INCLUDING 9228 MACRO MCPA-D/HD/M4 UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTORS (UTD), Continued
Filter Panel Entries for Flexent Filters Follow the procedure below to add the Flexent filter panels located in the frame to the unit type descriptor.

Step 1 2

Action Click Add Entry. In the new entry box that appears do the following. Select Filter Panel for the Unit Type line.

Figure 71: Unit Type Field Selecting Filter Panel Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 158

9218/9228 MACRO HD CELLS AND 9228 MACRO MCPA CONFIGURATIONS INCLUDING 9228 MACRO MCPA-D/HD/M4 UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTORS (UTD), Continued
Filter Panel Entries for Flexent Filters (continued)
Step 3 Action Determine entry in the center box of the Logical Unit Number/Number of Units line from below. IF the Flexent amps in the frame are connected to filters in a ... Primary frame Growth frame THEN select ... Number of Units Logical Unit Number

Figure 72: Logical Unit Number/Number of Units Field Selecting Logical Unit Number Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 159

9218/9228 MACRO HD CELLS AND 9228 MACRO MCPA CONFIGURATIONS INCLUDING 9228 MACRO MCPA-D/HD/M4 UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTORS (UTD), Continued
Filter Panel Entries for Flexent Filters (continued)
Step 4 Action Determine entry in the last box of the Logical Unit Number/Number of Units line from below. IF the Flexent amps in the frame are connected to filters in the ... Primary frame Growth frame 6 1 NOTE: The number entered in this box will be incremented for each filter entry. (2, 3, 4, 5, and 6) THEN enter ...

Figure 73: Last Box of Logical Unit Number/Number of Units Line Continued on next page Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 160

9218/9228 MACRO HD CELLS AND 9228 MACRO MCPA CONFIGURATIONS INCLUDING 9228 MACRO MCPA-D/HD/M4 UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTORS (UTD), Continued
Filter Panel Entries for Flexent Filters (continued)
Step 5 Action Determine entry in the Additional Information line from below. IF the Flexent amps in the frame are connected to filters in the ... Primary frame Growth frame Enter 0x0 i) Click Filter Panel Location THEN ...

Figure 74: Filter Panel Location Screen


ii) Select 2 for the Digital Shelf. iii) Select 1 for the Filter Shelf. iv) Select 1 for the Filter Number. NOTE: The number entered in this box will be incremented for each filter entry. (2,3,4,5, and 6) v) Click OK in the Filter Panel Location Window

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 161

9218/9228 MACRO HD CELLS AND 9228 MACRO MCPA CONFIGURATIONS INCLUDING 9228 MACRO MCPA-D/HD/M4 UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTORS (UTD), Continued
Filter Panel Entries for Flexent Filters (continued)
Step 6 Action Determine entry for the Unit Type Descriptor line from below. IF ... Modcell 3.0 filters Dual Duplex filters THEN select ... Modcell hybrid I2C/Ibutton interface Dual OneBTS Filter Panel

Figure 75: Unit Type Descriptor Field Selecting an Amplifier Type Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 162

9218/9228 MACRO HD CELLS AND 9228 MACRO MCPA CONFIGURATIONS INCLUDING 9228 MACRO MCPA-D/HD/M4 UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTORS (UTD), Continued
Filter Panel Entries for Flexent Filters (continued)
Step 7 Action Determine if steps need to be repeated. IF the filters are ... In the growth frame Not in the growth frame 8 THEN ... Repeat step 1-6 to add in the six filters Go to step 8

Go to FINAL PROCEDURES on page 172.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 163

9218/9228 MACRO HD CELLS AND 9228 MACRO MCPA CONFIGURATIONS INCLUDING 9228 MACRO MCPA-D/HD/M4 UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTORS (UTD), Continued
UTD Entry for 9228 Macro MCPA Configs Follow the procedure below to add TxAmpShelf to the unit type descriptor for 9228 Macro MCPA-D, 9228 Macro MCPA-HD, or 9228 Macro MCPA-M4.

Step 1 2

Action Click Add Entry. In the new entry box that appears do the following. Select TxAmpShelf for the Unit Type line.

Figure 76: Unit Type Field Selecting TxAmpShelf

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 164

9218/9228 MACRO HD CELLS AND 9228 MACRO MCPA CONFIGURATIONS INCLUDING 9228 MACRO MCPA-D/HD/M4 UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTORS (UTD), Continued
UTD Entry for 9228 Macro MCPA Configs (continued)

Step 3

Action Select Number of Units on the line below TxAmpShelf.

Figure 77: Selecting Number of Units

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 165

9218/9228 MACRO HD CELLS AND 9228 MACRO MCPA CONFIGURATIONS INCLUDING 9228 MACRO MCPA-D/HD/M4 UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTORS (UTD), Continued
UTD Entry for 9228 Macro MCPA Configs (continued)

Step 4 Select 3 for the number of units.

Action

Figure 78: Entering 3 for the Number of Units


5 Enter 0x0 for Additional Information.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 166

9218/9228 MACRO HD CELLS AND 9228 MACRO MCPA CONFIGURATIONS INCLUDING 9228 MACRO MCPA-D/HD/M4 UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTORS (UTD), Continued
UTD Entry for 9228 Macro MCPA Configs (continued)

Step 6

Action Select TxAmpShelf, Ethernet Interface for the Unit Type Descriptor line.

Figure 79: Selecting Unit Type Descriptor Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 167

9218/9228 MACRO HD CELLS AND 9228 MACRO MCPA CONFIGURATIONS INCLUDING 9228 MACRO MCPA-D/HD/M4 UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTORS (UTD), Continued
UTD Entry for 9228 Macro MCPA Configs (continued)
Step 7 Action Determine the Unit Type Discriptor. IF the MPCA Shelf ... has Duplex Filters has Simplex Filters 8 THEN ... proceed to Step 8. proceed to Step 10.

Select TxAmpShelf, Ethernet Interface, 2 Antenna Ports for the Unit Type Descriptor line.

Figure 80: Selecting Unit Type Descriptor for Duplex Filters


9 Proceed to FINAL PROCEDURES on page 172.

Continued on next page Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 168

9218/9228 MACRO HD CELLS AND 9228 MACRO MCPA CONFIGURATIONS INCLUDING 9228 MACRO MCPA-D/HD/M4 UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTORS (UTD), Continued
UTD Entry for 9228 Macro MCPA Configs (continued)
Step 10 Action Select TxAmpShelf, Ethernet Interface, 4 Antenna Ports for the Unit Type Descriptor line.

Figure 81: Selecting Unit Type Descriptor for Simplex Filters


11 Proceed to FINAL PROCEDURES on page 172.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 169

BTS FRAME DESCRIPTOR RECORD


BTS Frame Descriptor Record Information The Frame Descriptor Record is an XML file located on a CDM EEPROM and is: Used by RMT during calibration -- only for the 9222 Base Station Micro (formally BTS 2400) and 9224 Base Station Sub-Compact (formally Base Station 4400) type frames at this time. Set in the factory based on cabinet configuration and equipage. The same for all equipped controllers in a cabinet (Voice and EVDO controllers must have the same Frame Descriptor file).

How to Modify an existing Frame Descriptor XML File

Follow steps and procedures below to modify an existing Frame Descriptor record.

Step 1 2 Connect with RMT.

Action

Click on Config Cell Frame Descriptor Record. (The following window will appear, as shown in the example below.)

3 4

Select the URC that requires an update. Select the desired Cabinet Type and click Apply.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 170

BTS FRAME DESCRIPTOR RECORD, Continued


How to Modify an existing Frame Descriptor XML File (continued)
Step 5 Action The Synchronized EEPROM Write window appears. Verify that all equipped URCs including the spare (URC 4) have a check mark.

6 7 8

Click Confirm. RMT will update all the selected URCs. Click Cancel in the Configure Unit Type Descriptor window. Go to FINAL PROCEDURES on page 172.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 171

FINAL PROCEDURES
Apply the UTD to all URCs in the Frame Use the steps below to apply the UTD to all equipped URCs in the frame.

Step 1 2

Action Click Apply at the bottom of the Configure Unit Type Descriptor window. Inspect the Synchronized EEPROM Write window and verify all equipped URCs including the spare (URC 4) if equipped have a check mark.

3 4

Click Confirm. NOTE: RMT will update all the selected URCs. Click Cancel in the Configure Unit Type Descriptor window.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 172

FINAL PROCEDURES, Continued


Test Cleanup/ Final Procedures Follow the procedure below for test cleanup procedures.

Step 1 2 3 4 5

Action Click DISCONNECT on the RMT screen. Click File Exit. Remove all test equipment connections from the cell. Reconnect the T1/E1, if removed. Determine the next procedure to execute. IF THEN Press the RESET button on the front face plate of the Digital Module.
RESET

The Base Station is a 9223 Base Station Ultra-Compact

Any other Base Station

reseat all the equipped URCs. CAUTION: Unscrew URCs

Secure the cabinet door.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 173

This page intentionally left blank.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 174

Backplane Descriptor Files and Parameters


Section JA320 - Verifying and Setting the Tower Top Low Noise Amplifier Descritor and Inventory GENERAL
Section Description This section describes the procedures to verify and update the TTLNA Descriptors and TTLNA Inventory performed as part of standalone Remote Maintenance Tool (RMT) testing. Perform these procedures if problems occur during the integration process of the cell equipment or when updates are needed to the existing backplane parameters (i.e. during carrier or radio growth scenarios).

Terminology

Tower Top Low Noise Amplifier (TTLNA) is also known as a Tower Masthead Antenna (TMA). In this section we will refer to it as a TTLNA.

Base Stations This Applies to

The procedures in this section apply to 9226 Base Station Compact (formally Compact 4.0B) and 9224 Base Station Sub-Compact (formally Base Station 4400) only.

IMPORTANT: Required RMT Version

RMT 28.0 or later is required to run this section.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 175

TTLNA INFORMATION
TTLNA Requires Backplane Provisioning In order to provision the TTLNA, backplane updates must be made to all cell controllers.

The TTLNA Inventory may also need to be provisioned/updated.

When to Update the TTLNA Descriptor or TTLNA Inventory

The TTLNA Descriptor should only be updated on Compact 4.0Bs or Base Station 4400s that are newly installed or being upgraded to use TTLNAs. The TTLNA Inventory should be updated on 9226 Base Station Compact and 9224 Base Station Sub-Compact frames that are installed or being upgraded to use TTLNAs when inventory data has been provided.

XML Files NOT bundled with RMT

No XML files that can be recalled and applied are bundled with RMT at this time. You must follow the procedures in this section to update the TTLNA Descriptors and/or TTLNA Inventory.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 176

PROVISIONING TOWER TOP LOW NOISE AMPLIFIERS (TTLNA)


TLNA Descriptor File The TTLNA descriptor is a set of records that describe information about the TTLNA connected to the Cell. NOTE: The information for the TTLNA Descriptor is specific to the model of TTLNA installed in the antenna path of the Cell. The TTLNA Descriptor information is populated during standalone RMT testing. Contact the Project Manager for the appropriate market data. Items to be set in the TTLNA Descriptor are: TTLNA equipage TTLNA current alarm levels TTLNA group delays TTLNA gains

NOTE: It is required that the Verify TTLNA Current procedure be performed, even if the TTLNA descriptor information is not available. Perform the steps in the next section to populate the TTLNA Descriptor data.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 177

Provisioning Tower top low noise amplifiers (TTLNA), Continued


Input TTLNA Descriptor Parameters Follow the steps below to input the required TTLNA parameters. Refer to the previous page to determine which parameters are required based on the TTLNA DC Power source.

Step 1 2 Connect with RMT.

Action

From the Main RMT screen, click Config Cell TTLNA Descriptor. NOTE: A TTLNA Descriptor parameters not programmed window may pop up if the TTLNAs values have not been previously programmed, if it does appear then click OK. Select the filter panel to be updated.

4 5

Enter the TTLNA information as provided or from the TTLNA manufacturer data sheet for each unit associated with the filter panel (See Figure 82 and Table 11) After all parameters have been entered for the TTLNA associated with that filter, click Apply to write the values into memory. IF multiple controllers ... ARE equipped (and inserted) Are NOT equipped (or not inserted) THEN ... Click Confirm in the Synchronized EEPROM Write window that will appear Take no action. Go to Step 6.

6 7

Repeat steps 3-5 for each antenna path equipped with a TTLNA. Go to Verify TTLNA Current on page 180.

Table 11: TTLNA Descriptors


Parameter Normal Lo (mA) Description Low end of operating current. Example: If operating current is listed as 125+/- 10, then the low would be 115 (125 10). You should factor in about a 10% leeway so amount entered would be 103 [115 (115 x .10)= 103.5 then round down to 103] High end of operating current. Example: If operating current is listed as 125+/- 10, then the high would be 135 (125 + 10). You should factor in about a 10% leeway so amount entered would be 149 [135 + (135 x .10) = 148.5 then round up to 149]. Listed on specification sheet as Rx total group delay or Uplink total group delay. Listed on specification sheet as Tx total group delay or Downlink total group delay. Listed on specification sheet as Rx Gain or Gain Listed on specification sheet as Tx Loss or Tx Insertion Loss

Normal Hi (mA)

Rx Group Delay (ns) Tx Group Delay (ns) Rx Nominal Gain (dB) Tx Nominal Att. (dB)

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 178

Provisioning Tower top low noise amplifiers (TTLNA), Continued

Figure 82: TTLNA Descriptor Dialog Window

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 179

Provisioning Tower top low noise amplifiers (TTLNA), Continued


Verify TTLNA Current The following steps verify the proper operation of an equipped TTLNA by measuring the current drawn by the active amplifier. NOTE: The Cell can ONLY measure the DC current draw of a TTLNA that is being powered by the Cell Filter Panel. Skip this procedure if an external PDU is powering the TTLNAs, or if the TTLNAs or antenna feed lines have not yet been connected to the Cell. Step 1 Action From the TTLNA Descriptor Dialog Window (Config Cell TTLNA Descriptor): Select a Filter (start with Filter 1). Verify the TTLNA is active by observing that the TTLNA LED on the filter panel is illuminated green, and the Disable/Enable TTLNA button on the TTLNA Descriptor Dialog window reads Disable TTLNA. If the button is labeled Disable TTLNA Enable TTLNA Then the TTLNA is active. Proceed to Current Measurement (Step 2). is not active. Verify the TTLNA has been installed and click the Enable TTLNA button. Verify the TTTLNA is operational by repeating step 1.

Click Get Current in the DC Current (mA) sub-window. A measured current value and the Get DC Current done message will appear. REQUIREMENT: A value between the Normal Lo (mA) and Normal Hi (mA) MUST appear. IF the current value is... 0 or is NOT between the Normal Lo and Normal Hi THEN ... the TTLNA and antenna paths should be investigated for problems there may be a dummy load or attenuator connected to the cells antenna port. Make sure the cells antenna is directly connected to the TTLNA via RF cables.

very high (200+ mA)

3 4 5

Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each antenna path (Filters 2 6) equipped with a TTLNA. Click Save to save a copy of the TTLNA Descriptor File. In the pop up window, enter a name that corresponds to the BTS currently connected, and click Save. Click on Cancel to exit the TTLNA Descriptor Dialog screen.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 180

Provisioning Tower top low noise amplifiers (TTLNA), Continued


TTLNA Inventory Since the TTLNA is not part of the Cell, and there is no remote access to the unit. The inventory data must be stored within the BTS to allow it to be shown in inventory. NOTE: The information for the TTLNA Inventory record is specific to the model of TTLNA installed in the antenna path of the Cell. The TTLNA Inventory information is populated during standalone RMT testing. Perform the following steps to configure the TTLNA Inventory. Step 1 Action From the Main RMT screen, click Config Cell TTLNA Inventory. NOTE: the first Time you will get an TTLNA inventory not programmed error screen, click OK. Enter the filter panel number at the top under Select a Filer Panel. (See Figure 83) Select the TTLNA Number for the filter panel. NOTE: Typically this value is always 1 and cannot be changed. Enter in the inventory information as provided by the customer or TTLNA vendor. NOTE: See Figure 84 for an example. Click on Apply to save the information entered to the filter NVM. Click Save to save a copy of the Inventory information. NOTE: In the pop up window, enter a name that corresponds to the BTS and antenna number, and click on Save. Repeat steps 2 through 6 for each TTLNA and Filter Panel equipped. Click on Cancel to exit the TTLNA Inventory Dialog screen.

2 3 4 5 6

7 8 Verify TTLNA Cell Equipage

Use the following procedure to verify the TTLNA Inventory appears when the cell equipage is queried. Step 1 2 3 4 Action Click on Equipage Cell and wait for the cell equipage to populate. Confirm TTLNA appears on the list of components in the cell (see Figure 85). Click on the plus sign next to TTLNA. Click on each TTLNA and verify that the TTLNA Inventory is populated as you entered it. NOTE: TTLNAs 1 6 correspond to Filters 1 6, respectively. Decide what to do next IF the TTLNA Inventory ... appears in the Cell equipage does NOT appear in the Cell equipage THEN ... Go to Applying TTLNA Descriptors on page 184. Repeat the TTLNA Inventory procedure above.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 181

Provisioning Tower top low noise amplifiers (TTLNA), Continued

Figure 83: Blank TTLNA Inventory Dialog Window

Always 1

Enter TTLNA (TMA)

Enter Serial Number of TTLNA (up to 12 characters). If S/N is longer than 12 characters then enter excess in Series box.

Enter TTLNA Model Number under KS Specification

Figure 84: Example of TTLNA Inventory Dialog Window

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 182

Provisioning Tower top low noise amplifiers (TTLNA), Continued

Figure 85: RMT Cell Inventory Screen

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 183

APPLYING TTLNA DESCRIPTORS


General After configuring the TTLNA Descriptor and/or TTLNA Inventory, the data must be applied to the backplane for all controllers. Step 1 Action Determine whether to perform this procedure. IF ... More than 1 controller is present in the frame. Only 1 controller is present in the frame 2 3 Verify all controllers are plugged-into this frame. Click Apply from the TTLNA Descriptor window (Config Cell TTLNA Descriptor) then click Confirm in the Synchronized EEPROM Write window. THEN ... Proceed to Step 2. Proceed to Step 5.

NOTE: RMT checks for the existence of other equipped URCs and prompt the user to update the backplane. Verify that all equipped URCs are shown and checked (). 4 If TTLNA Inventory was updated, then click Apply from the TTLNA Inventory window (Config Cell TTLNA Inventory) then click Confirm in the Synchronized EEPROM Write window Proceed to FINAL PROCEDURES on the next page.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 184

FINAL PROCEDURES
Test Cleanup/ Final Procedures Follow the procedure below for test cleanup procedures.

Step 1 Determine what to do next: IF ...

Action

THEN ... Go the appropriate section to perform procedure. Click DISCONNECT on the RMT screen then go to step 2.

You have further RMT testing to do Do not have any more RMT testing to do 2 3 4 5 6 Click File Exit.

Remove all test equipment connections from the cell. Reconnect the T1/E1, if disconnected. Reseat all equipped controllers. Secure the cabinet door.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 185

This page intentionally left blank.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 186

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP BACKPLANE PARAMETERS


RMT 31.0 Job Aid Section JA400 GENERAL INFORMATION
Purpose This section describes procedures for verifying and setting BTS Primary RF Path Map backplane parameters. The BTS Primary RF Path Maps are verified and set using RMT and are accessed via the RMT pull-down menu (as shown below):

In conjunction with the on-line RMT HELP menu, the following procedures will aid the user in verifying and setting these backplane parameters.

The following procedures are provided in this section: Section/Description

Section JA410 - Verifying and Setting BTS Primary RF Path Map on page 189

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 187

This page intentionally left blank.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 188

BTS Primary RF Path Map Backplane Parameters


Section JA410 - Verifying and Setting BTS Primary RF Path Map GENERAL
Section Description This section describes procedures for verifying and setting the BTS Primary RF Path Map backplane parameters for the following platforms: 9218/9228 Base Station Macro 9216/9226 Base Station Compact 9223 Base Station Ultra-Compact 9224 Base Station Sub-Compact 9224 Base Station Sub-Compact EN 9228 Base Station Macro IN 9228 Base Station Macro LP 9218/9228 Macro HD 9228 Macro MCPA-D 9228 Macro MCPA-HD 9228 Macro MCPA-M4

The BTS Primary RF Path Map is verified and set using the Remote Maintenance Tool (RMT). It is assumed that the cell equipment has already been integrated and is in-service, meaning the RF Path Map was properly configured at the time of integration. The procedures specified herein are to be performed if problems occur during the operation of the cell equipment or when updates need to be made to the existing RF Path Map. The BTS Primary RF Path Map parameters can be reviewed either on-line or off-line via the RMT connection. It is highly recommended that whenever changes or updates are made to the backplane parameters that the cell is removed from service.

Note: When creating or modifying .xml files always save a copy of the file to the appropriate directory folder on your computer.

MCR vs. UCR

The instructions in this section apply to both UCRs (5MHz radio) and MCRs (15 MHz radio). The term Radio used throughout this section refers to both UCR and MCR.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 189

FACILITIES DISCONNECTION
Facilities Disconnection The connection between the switch and the cell must be removed prior to performing RMT standalone testing. Step 1 Action Refer to the FACILITIES DISCONNECTION procedures on page 52 to remove the cell from service.

RMT INITIALIZATION
Connect with RMT Use the following procedure to connect to the cells CDMA voice controller (URC) with RMT. Refer to the RMT Initialization and Startup procedures on page 17. Step 1 Action Connect to the cell controller (URC) with RMT. WARNING: With Release 31 or later, the Amplifiers in the MCPA-A frame will automatically receive firmware updates. If an amplifier is receiving a firmware update, the status LED on the amplifier will be blinking orange and yellow during the download. To prevent damage to the amplifier, DO NOT interrupt the download process. The download takes approximately 4 minutes for each amplifier. 2 Proceed as directed by the table below: IF the cell is a 9218/9228 Macro HD . 9228 Macro MCPA-D or 9228 Macro MCPAHD or 9228 Macro MCPAM4. 9218/9228 Base Station Macro or 9216/9226 Base Station Compact or 9223 Base Station Ultra-Compact or 9224 Base Station Sub-Compact or 9224 Base Station Sub-Compact EN or 9228 Base Station Macro IN or 9228 Base Station Macro LP. THEN Go to 9218/9228 MACRO HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP on the next page. Go to 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION on page 218.

Go to BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD) on page 238.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 190

9218/9228 MACRO HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP


Section Description This section describes the procedures to verify and update the BTS Primary RF Path Map on the following products: 9128/9228 High Density (HD) connected to: o S2 LAF frame o Pre-R29 BS 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A frame (MCPA) (without filters) Pre-R29 9128/9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A (without filters) configurations are defined as configurations where the S2 LAF frame has been replaced with an 9228 Base Station Macro MCPAA frame but the digital shelf has not been reconfigured to support the R29 interface between the digital shelf and the 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A frame. o Pre-R29 BS 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A frame (MCPA) (with filters) Pre-R29 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A (with filters) configurations are defined as configurations where the S2 LAF and AIF frames have been replaced with an 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A frame with filters but the digital shelf has not been reconfigured to support the R29 interface between the digital shelf and the 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A frame. Pre-R29 Cell Generic Note: Pre-R29 configurations can operate on R29 and later cell generics but are not considered R29 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA configurations until the lineup has been reconfigured to support the R29 interface between the digital shelf and the 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A frame. Updating the BTS Primary RF Path Map requires the use of the Remote Maintenance Tool (RMT). The procedures specified herein are to be performed if: Do Not Use This Section for R29 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA Configurations Updates are needed to the existing backplane parameters (i.e. during carrier growth, or pre R29 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A installation, or radio growth scenarios); Problems occur during the integration process of the cell equipment.

This section cannot be used to update the BTS Primary RF Path Map on R29 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA configurations. Go to 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION on page 218 to program the BTS Primary RF Path Map for these configurations: R29 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA Configurations are defined as lineups that support the R29 interface between the digital shelf and the 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A frame. R29 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA Configurations include the following lineups: o 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-D o 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-HD o 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-M4 BTS Primary RF Path Maps are set in the factory based on the cabinet configuration and equipage. If problems are experienced during the integration efforts related to the BTS RF Primary Path Map and/or when field changes are made to the cabinet, use the following procedures to update the path map information. This section gives instructions for populating each field of the BTS Primary RF Path Map.

When to Update the BTS Primary RF Path Map

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 191

9218/9228 MACRO HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP, Continued


Configuration Aid Document (CA 100) The procedures outlined in this section are supported with the .xml files packaged in the Configuration Aid (CA 100) document. The CA 100 document is available through the AlcatelLucent Customer Information Center (CIC) see CONFIGURATION AID (CA100) INSTALLATION on page 14 for information on accessing and loading this document. The CA 100 document includes: The various cell configurations, Applicable RF power calibration sections, and Packaged XML files.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 192

9218/9228 MACRO HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP, Continued


Test Equipment Information The following provides test equipment information that pertains to the 9128/9228 Macro HD configurations.

TDU Numbering

Currently a frame with UCRs (5 MHz Radio) can be equipped with the TDU 1 and TDU 2. TDU 1 is used for antenna tests while TDU 2 is used for Closed Loop Gain Control (CLGC). RMT does not reference TDU in the same manner as ECP Database translations. See the table below. This Handbook section follows the RMT convention and refers to the TDU in a frame as TDU 1 or TDU 2. Frame Primary RMT Reference 1 2 Growth #1 Database Translation Reference 1 2 Function Antenna Test CLGC

Not Applicable. TDU is not support in an HD Growth 1 frame.

TDU Connections

TDU 1 connects to the J2 & J3 ports for Duplex and Triplex filters. TDU 2 connects to the external coupler on the J8 or J9 port of the Duplex and Triplex filters.

MCR Connections

For the HD RF paths, the MCR connects to a Dual Duplex Filter (MCRs transmitting through a Modcell 3.0 Filter is not supported). The MCR supports both Antenna Test and Closed Loop Gain Control (CLGC). The following ports on the MCR are used for these functions: MCR Port RC1 RC2 TONE Dual Duplex Filter Connection J11 J31 J41 Function CLGC (for Tx1 port) CLGC (for Tx2 port) Antenna Test

NOTE: The MCR can also connect to the HD Combiner Attenuator Unit (CAU). In this case, the MCR is transmitting through the SII LAC or pre-R29 BS 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A (MCPA). CLGC is not supported for MCRs connected to a CAU and Antenna Tests are executed by the SII RTU (if equipped).

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 193

9218/9228 MACRO HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP, Continued


Save Original BTS Primary RF Path Map Follow this procedure to save the original BTS Primary RF Path Map. NOTE: Always save the original factory BTS Primary RF Path Map because it may contain calibration data or for back out procedures. Step 1 Action Click Config RF Calibration BTS Primary RF Path Map, from the RMT main screen. A window appears as shown below.

Figure 86: BTS Primary RF Path Map (example)


2 Select Common Data from the Version box at the top of the window.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 194

9218/9228 MACRO HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP, Continued


Save Original BTS Primary RF Path Map (continued)
Step 3 Select the URC. IF saving Path Map for URC1 URC2 URC3 THEN set Select the URC you want to update to 1 2 3 Action

Click Save in the Configuration File Box to save a copy of the current Primary RF Path Map. NOTE: After clicking Save, type the filename as shown below and save it to a directory as desired. Refer to SAVE CONFIGURATION FILE on page 285 for procedures to create a directory to store files. Cell x Original Radio Path Map where x = Cell Number

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 195

9218/9228 MACRO HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP, Continued


Verify Port Map Version Follow this procedure to verify the Port Map Version is set to 1. NOTE: The Port Map Version for all URCs must be set to 1. Step 1 Action Determine the current Port Map Version. NOTE: The Port Map Version is located on the top right of the BTS Primary RF Path Map screen. See Figure 86 on page 194. Update the Port Map Version as needed. IF the Port Map Version is 0 1 3 THEN Proceed to CHANGING PORT MAP VERSIONS on page 290 to change the Port Map Version to 1. Proceed to Step 3.

Proceed to Step 3.

Proceed to Filter Panel Numbering (Tx) on next page.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 196

9218/9228 MACRO HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP, Continued


Filter Panel Numbering (Tx) The figure below illustrates the filter numbering for Duplex, Triplex and Dual Duplex configurations. The 850 [LAC or BS 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A (MCPA)] transmit path is also shown. Identify the filter location and configuration for each radio before continuing with this section. The HD product may have in the same frames configuration: 850 (Voice) radios transmitting through SII LACs and AIF, 850 (Voice and EVDO) radios transmitting through BS 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A (MCPA), PCS (Voice and Data) radios transmitting through Modcell Amps/Filters. Trace the radios Tx cable to determine the appropriate transmit path.

Figure 87: Filter Panel Numbering (Tx) Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 197

9218/9228 MACRO HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP, Continued


Configure and Update BTS Primary RF Path Map Use procedures below in case you have no existing BTS Primary RF Path Map XML file and need to create that file based on cell specific configuration. In order to fully configure and update the BTS Primary RF Path Map the following sections must be completed: Common Data TX1 Radio Settings Common Data TX2 Radio Settings Common Data RX1 Radio Settings Common Data RX2 Radio Settings Update LAM Parameters Misc. Parameters Apply BTS Primary RF Path Map Settings Follow this procedure to set the TX1 Radio settings for each radio. Each radio has its own RF path and therefore BTS Primary RF Path Map settings are unique.

Common Data TX1 Radio Settings

Step 1 2

Action On the BTS Primary RF Path Map screen, place a checkmark ( ) for each equipped radio (Radio Number 1 through 6). Verify TX1 B3 Cal Gain value is between 35 and 48. IF TX1 B3 Cal Gain is Outside of range NOTE: After completing this section, RF Power Calibration is needed. AND the TX1 Port is Transmitting through a Filter in the HD frame Not used or connected to the HD CAU [LAC or BS 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A (MCPA)] N/A THEN set TX1 B3 Cal Gain to 43.00

44.00

In range 3 Set the TX1 Antenna value.

Proceed to Step 4.

IF the Radio TX1 Port is transmitting through ... HD CAU NOTE: Using a SII LAC or BS 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A (MCPA) Diversity 0 Filter in a Primary frame Diversity 1 Filter in a Primary frame Diversity 0 filter in a Growth 1 frame Diversity 1 filter in a Growth 1 frame Not used

THEN set TX1 Antenna to 1

1 2 3 4 1

NOTE: Refer to Figure 87: Filter Panel Numbering (Tx), on page 197, for information on filter configurations.

Continued on next page Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 198

9218/9228 MACRO HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP, Continued


Common Data TX1 Radio Settings (continued)
Step 4 Determine the TX1 FP Type value. IF the Radio TX1 Port is transmitting through ... Modcell 3.0 type filter Dual Duplex type filter HD CAU NOTE: Using a SII LAC or BS 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A (MCPA) Not used 5 Determine TX1 Digital Shelf value. IF the Radio TX1 Port is transmitting through ... Filter in a Primary HD frame Filter in a Growth 1 HD frame HD CAU NOTE: Using a SII LAC or BS 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A (MCPA) Not used 6 7 Set TX1 Filter Shelf to 1. Determine TX1 Filter Panel setting. IF the Radios TX1 port is transmitting through Flexent Filters (Same frame or different frame) HD CAU NOTE: Using a SII LAC or BS 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A (MCPA) Not used THEN set TX1 Filter Panel to 16 THEN set TX1 Digital Shelf to ... Primary Growth-1 Local Local THEN set TX1 FP Type to ... Modcell3.0 DualDuplexer NoFilterPanel NoFilterPanel Action

NOTE: Use the filter number where the Radios TX1 Port is connected. Trace the cables from Radios TX1 port to the Amplifier and then to the Filter. Refer to Refer to Figure 87: Filter Panel Numbering (Tx), on page 197, for more information on filter configurations.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 199

9218/9228 MACRO HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP, Continued


Common Data TX1 Radio Settings (continued)
Step 8 Determine the TX1 RF Path value. IF the Radios TX1 port is connected to HD CAU [LAC or BS 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A (MCPA)], J8 Port (Modcell 3.0 Duplex/Triplex Filter) J8 or J28 Port (Dual Duplex Filter), or Not used (no connection) THEN set TX1 RF Path to 1 Action

J9 Port (Modcell 3.0 Triplex Filter) 9 Determine the TX1 Coupler Type value. IF the Radios TX1 port is Supported by CLGC Not supported by CLGC HD CAU NOTE: Using a SII LAC or BS 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A (MCPA) Not used 10 Proceed to Common Data TX2 Radio Settings on page 201.

THEN set TX1 Coupler Type to DPD Default Default

Default

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 200

9218/9228 MACRO HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP, Continued


Common Data TX2 Radio Settings Follow this procedure to set the Radios TX2 values. Each radio has its own RF path and therefore BTS Primary RF Path Map settings are unique.

Step 1

Action Verify TX2 B3 Cal Gain value is between 35 and 48. IF TX2 B3 Cal Gain is Outside of range NOTE: After completing this section, RF Power Calibration is needed. AND the TX2 Port is Transmitting through a Filter in the HD frame HD CAU NOTE: Using a SII LAC or BS 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A (MCPA) Not used In range N/A THEN set TX2 B3 Cal Gain to 43.00 44.00

44.00 Proceed to Step 3.

Set the TX2 Antenna value. IF the Radios TX2 port is transmitting through HD CAU NOTE: Using a SII LAC or BS 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A (MCPA) Diversity 0 Filter in a Primary frame Diversity 1 Filter in a Primary frame Diversity 0 filter in a Growth 1 frame Diversity 1 filter in a Growth 1 frame Not used THEN set TX2 Antenna to 1

1 2 3 4 1

NOTE: Refer to Refer to Figure 87: Filter Panel Numbering (Tx), on page 197, for more information on filter configurations. 3 Determine the TX2 FP Type value IF the Radio TX2 Port is transmitting through ... Modcell 3.0 type filter Dual Duplex type filter HD CAU NOTE: Using a SII LAC or BS 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A (MCPA) Not used THEN set TX2 FP Type to ... Modcell3.0 DualDuplexer NoFilterPanel NoFilterPanel

Continued on next page Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 201

9218/9228 MACRO HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP, Continued


Common Data TX2 Radio Settings (continued)

Step 4

Action Determine the TX2 Digital Shelf value. IF the Radio TX2 Port is transmitting through ... Filter in a Primary HD frame Filter in a Growth 1 HD frame HD CAU NOTE: Using a SII LAC or BS 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A (MCPA) Not used THEN set TX2 Digital Shelf to ... Primary Growth-1 Local Local

5 6

Set TX2 Filter Shelf to 1. Determine the TX2 Filter Panel value. IF the Radios TX2 port is transmitting through Flexent Filters (Same frame or different frame) HD CAU NOTE: Using a SII LAC or BS 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A (MCPA) Not used THEN set TX2 Filter Panel to 16

NOTE: Use the filter number where the Radios TX2 Port is connected. Trace the cables from Radios TX2 port to the Amplifier and the Filter. Refer to Refer to Figure 87: Filter Panel Numbering (Tx), on page 197, for more information on filter configurations. 7 Determine the TX2 RF Path value. IF the Radios TX2 port is connected to HD CAU (SLAC/BS 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A (MCPA)), J8 Port (Modcell 3.0 Duplex/Triplex Filter) J8 or J28 Port (Dual Duplex Filter), or Not used (no connection) THEN set TX2 RF Path to 1

J9 Port (Modcell 3.0 Triplex Filter)

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 202

9218/9228 MACRO HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP, Continued


Common Data TX2 Radio Settings (continued)
Step 8 Action Determine the TX2 Coupler Type value. IF the Radios TX2 port is Supported by CLGC Not supported by CLGC HD CAU NOTE: Using a SII LAC or BS 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A (MCPA) Not used 9 Proceed to Common Data RX1 Radio Settings on page 205. THEN set TX2 Coupler Type to DPD Default Default

Default

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 203

9218/9228 MACRO HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP, Continued


Filter Panel Numbering (Rx) The figure below illustrates the filter numbering for Duplex, Triplex and Dual Duplex configurations. The SII (CAU) receive path is also shown. Identify the filter location and configuration for each radio before continuing with this section. The HD product may have in the same frames configuration: 850 (Voice) radios receiving through SII LACs and AIF, 850 (Voice and EVDO) radios receiving through BS 9228 Base Station Macro MCPAA (MCPA), PCS (Voice and Data) radios receiving through Modcell Amps/Filters. NOTE: Trace the radios Rx cable to determine if the appropriate receive path.

Alpha Div 0 J6

Alpha Div 1 J6 J5 J4 Filter 2

Beta Div 0 J6 J5 J4 Filter 3

Beta Div 1 J6 J5 J4 Filter 4

Gamma Div 0 J6 J5 J4 Filter 5

Gamma Div 1 J6 J5 J4 Filter 6

Duplex or Triplex Filter Panels

J5 J4 Filter 1

Slot 1

Slot 2

Slot 3

Slot 4

Slot 5

Slot 6

Alpha

Beta Filter 2 Div 1 J24 J25 J26 Filter 3 Div 0 J4 J5 J6 Filter 4 Div 1 J24 J25 J26

Dual Duplex Filter Panels

Filter 1 Div 0 J4 J5 J6

Gamma Filter 5 Filter 6 Div 0 Div 1 J4 J24 J5 J25 J6 J26

Slot 1

Slot 2

Slot 3

SII AIF (through CAU)

Radio

CAU

Antenna Interface Frame (AIF)

NOTE: The HD product may have both 850 (Voice) radios (transmitting through SII LACs or BS 9228 (MCPA) and Filters) and 850 (Data) and PCS (Voice and Data) radios (transmitting through Flexent Amps/Filters) in the same frame. Trace the radios Rx cable to determine if the appropriate receive path.

Figure 88: Filter Panel Numbering (Rx) Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 204

9218/9228 MACRO HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP, Continued


Common Data RX1 Radio Settings Follow this procedure to set the RX1 Radio values.

Step 1 Determine the RX1 B2 Cal value. IF the Radios RX1 port is connected to Dual Duplex filter All other filter types 2 Determine the RX1 Antenna value.

Action

THEN set RX1 B2 Cal Loss to 1.5 5.0

IF the Radios RX1 port is connected to Rx Splitter NOTE: Using the HD CAU Shelf. Diversity 0 Filter in a Primary frame Diversity 1 Filter in a Primary frame Diversity 0 filter in a Growth 1 frame Diversity 1 filter in a Growth 1 frame No used

THEN set RX1 Antenna to 1 1 2 3 4 1

NOTE: Refer to Figure 88: Filter Panel Numbering (Rx), on page 204, for information on filter configurations. 3 Determine the RX1 FP Type value. IF the Radio RX1 Port is connected to ... Modcell 3.0 type filter panel Dual Duplex type filter panel Rx Splitter NOTE: Using the HD CAU Shelf. Not used THEN set RX1 FP Type to ... Modcell3.0 DualDuplexer NoFilterPanel NoFilterPanel

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 205

9218/9228 MACRO HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP, Continued


Common Data RX1 Radio Settings (continued)
Step 4 Action Determine the RX1 Digital Shelf value. IF the Radio RX1 Port is connected to ... Filter in a Primary HD frame Filter in a HD Growth frame Rx Splitter NOTE: Using the HD CAU Shelf. Not used 5 6 Set RX1 Filter Shelf to 1. Determine the RX1 Filter Panel value. IF the Radios RX1 port is connected to Flexent Filters (Same frame or different frame) Rx Splitter NOTE: Using the HD CAU Shelf. Not used THEN set RX1 Filter Panel to 16 (See NOTE) 0 0 THEN set RX1 Digital Shelf to ... Primary Growth-1 Local Local

NOTE: Use the filter number where the Radios RX1 port is connected. Trace the cables from the Radio RX1 port to the filter. Refer to Figure 88: Filter Panel Numbering (Rx), on page 204, for more information on filter configurations. 7 8 Set RX1 RF Path to 1. Set RX1 EAC to Rear EAC.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 206

9218/9228 MACRO HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP, Continued


Common Data RX1 Radio Settings (continued)
Step 9 Action Determine the RX1 FP Connector value. IF the RX1 port of the Radio is connected to the Rx Splitter NOTE: Using the HD CAU Shelf. The J4 or J24 port (any filter type, in any HD frame) The J5 or J25 port (any filter type, in any HD frame) The J6 or J26 port (any filter type, in any HD frame) Not used 10 Proceed to Common Data RX2 Radio Settings on page 208. THEN set RX1 FP Connector to J4/J24 J4/J24 J5/J25 J6/J26 J4/J24

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 207

9218/9228 MACRO HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP, Continued


Common Data RX2 Radio Settings Follow this procedure to determine the RX2 settings for each radio.

Step 1 Determine the RX2 B2 Cal value. IF the Radios RX2 port is connected to Dual Duplex filter All other filter type

Action

THEN set RX1 B2 Cal Loss to 1.5 5.0

Determine the RX2 Antenna value. IF the Radios RX2 port is connected to Rx Splitter NOTE: Using the HD CAU Shelf. Diversity 0 Filter in a Primary frame Diversity 1 Filter in a Primary frame Diversity 0 filter in a Growth 1 frame Diversity 1 filter in a Growth 1 frame Not used THEN set RX2 Antenna to 1 1 2 3 4 1

NOTE: Refer to Figure 88: Filter Panel Numbering (Rx), on page 204, for more information on filter configurations. 3 Determine RX2 FP Type setting. IF the Radio RX2 Port is connected to ... Modcell 3.0 type filter panel Dual Duplex type filter panel Rx Splitter NOTE: Using the HD CAU Shelf. Not used THEN set RX2 FP Type to ... Modcell3.0 DualDuplexer NoFilterPanel NoFilterPanel

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 208

9218/9228 MACRO HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP, Continued


Common Data RX2 Radio Settings (continued)
Step 4 Action Determine the RX2 Digital Shelf value. IF the Radio RX2 Port is connected to ... Filter in a Primary HD frame Filter in an HD Growth frame Rx Splitter NOTE: Using the HD CAU Shelf. Not used 5 6 Set the RX2 Filter Shelf to 1. Determine the RX2 Filter Panel value. IF the Radios RX2 port is connected to Flexent Filters (Same frame or different frame) Rx Splitter NOTE: Using the HD CAU Shelf. Not used THEN set RX2 Filter Panel to 16 (See NOTE) 0 0 THEN set RX2 Digital Shelf to ... Primary Growth-1 Local Local

NOTE: Use the filter number where the Radios RX2 port is connected. Trace the cables from the Radio RX2 port to the filter. Refer to Figure 88: Filter Panel Numbering (Rx), on page 204, for more information on filter configurations. 7 8 Set RX2 RF Path to 1. Set RX2 EAC to Rear EAC.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 209

9218/9228 MACRO HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP, Continued


Common Data RX2 Radio Settings (continued)
Step 9 Action Determine the RX2 FP Connector value. IF the RX2 port of the Radio is connected to the Rx Splitter NOTE: Using the HD CAU Shelf. The J4 or J24 port (any filter type, in any HD frame) The J5 or J25 port (any filter type, in any HD frame) The J6 or J26 port (any filter type, in any HD frame) Not used 10 Proceed to Update LAM Parameters on next page. THEN set RX2 FP Connector to J4/J24 J4/J24 J5/J25 J6/J26 J4/J24

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 210

9218/9228 MACRO HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP, Continued


Update LAM Parameters Follow this procedure below to configure the LAM Parameters. Step 1 Select LAM Parms. Action

Figure 89: LAM Parms Screen (example) Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 211

9218/9228 MACRO HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP, Continued


Update LAM Parameters (continued)
Step 2 3 4 Set the TX1 Targ Pwr Offset to 0. Set TX1 LAM1 DSN through TX1 LAM6 DSN to 0. Determine the values for: TX1 Lam1 LUN TX1 Lam2 LUN TX1 Lam3 LUN IF the Radios TX1 port is connected to HD CAU [LAC or BS 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A (MCPA)] (or is not used) Flexent Amplifier (No Splitter) Flexent Amplifier through a 1:2 Splitter Flexent Amplifier through a 1:3 Splitter THEN use TX1 Lam1 LUN = 0xff TX1 Lam2 LUN = 0xff TX1 Lam3 LUN = 0xff TX1 Lam1 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number Tx1 Lam2 LUN = 0xff Tx1 Lam3 LUN = 0xff TX1 Lam1 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number TX1 Lam2 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number Tx1 Lam3 LUN = 0xff TX1 Lam1 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number TX1 Lam2 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number TX1 Lam3 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number Action

Set the following to 0xff: TX1 Lam4 LUN TX1 Lam5 LUN TX1 Lam6 LUN Set the TX2 Target Pwr Offset to 0. Set TX2 LAM1 DSN through TX2 LAM6 DSN to 0.

6 7

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 212

9218/9228 MACRO HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP, Continued


Update LAM Parameters (continued)
Step 8 Determine the values for: TX2 Lam1 LUN TX2 Lam2 LUN TX2 Lam3 LUN IF the Radios TX2 port is connected to HD CAU NOTE: Using a SII LAC or BS 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A (MCPA) Flexent Amplifier (No Splitter) Flexent Amplifier through a 1:2 Splitter Flexent Amplifier through a 1:3 Splitter No used THEN use TX1 Lam1 LUN = 0xff TX1 Lam2 LUN = 0xff TX1 Lam3 LUN = 0xff TX1 Lam1 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number Tx1 Lam2 LUN = 0xff Tx1 Lam3 LUN = 0xff TX1 Lam1 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number TX1 Lam2 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number Tx1 Lam3 LUN = 0xff TX1 Lam1 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number TX1 Lam2 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number TX1 Lam3 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number TX1 Lam1 LUN = 0xff TX1 Lam2 LUN = 0xff TX1 Lam3 LUN = 0xff Action

Set the following to 0xff: TX2 Lam4 LUN TX2 Lam5 LUN TX2 Lam6 LUN Proceed to Misc. Parameters on page 214.

10

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 213

9218/9228 MACRO HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP, Continued


Misc. Parameters Follow this procedure to set the Miscellaneous Parameters. Step 1 Select Misc Parms Action

Figure 90: Misc Parms Screen (example)


2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Set TX1 Conv UN to 0xff. Set TX2 Conv UN to 0xff. Set RX1 Conv UN to 0xff. Set RX2 Conv UN to 0xff. Set TX1 MCA DS Gain to 0.0. Set TX2 MCA DS Gain to 0.0. Set PAF to NoPafEntered. Set IA MU Type to Not Equipped. Set IA MU LUN to Not Equipped.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 214

9218/9228 MACRO HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP, Continued


Misc. Parameters (continued)
Step 11 Action Determine the Ant Test MU Type values. IF Radio is ... UCR (See NOTE below) MCR AND connected to HD CAU Flexent Amplifier AND N/A TDU 1 not equipped TDU 1 is equipped Flexent Amplifier in the same frame Supporting 850 EVDO Carrier Supporting PCS Carriers Flexent Amplifier in a different frame HD CAU Not equipped N/A N/A N/A N/A THEN use ... NotEquipped NotEquipped RfTestUnit NotEquipped Radio NotEquipped NotEquipped NotEquipped

NOTE: Refer to TDU Numbering on page 190 for information about TDU numbering. 12 Determine the Ant Test MU LUN values. IF the Ant Test MU Type is set to RF Test Unit Radio AND N/A Radio is 1 or 4 Radio is 2 or 5 Radio is 3 or 6 Not Equipped N/A THEN set Ant Test MU LUN to 1 1 2 3 NotEquipped

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 215

9218/9228 MACRO HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP, Continued


Misc. Parameters (continued)
Step 13 Action Determine the CLGC MU Type value. IF Radio is ... UCR (See NOTE below) MCR AND connected to HD CAU Flexent Amplifier AND N/A TDU 2 not equipped TDU 2 is equipped Flexent Amplifier Supporting 850 EVDO Carrier Supporting PCS Carriers HD CAU Not equipped N/A N/A N/A THEN use ... NotEquipped NotEquipped RfTestUnit NotEquipped Radio NotEquipped NotEquipped

NOTE: Refer to TDU Numbering on page 190 for information about TDU numbering. 14 Determine the CLCG MU LUN values. IF the CLCG MU Type is set to RF Test Unit Radio AND N/A Radio is 1 Radio is 2 Radio is 3 Radio is 4 Radio is 5 Radio is 6 Not Equipped 15 16 17 Set DPD MU Type to Not Equipped. Set DPD MU LUN to Not Equipped. Proceed to Apply BTS Primary RF Path Map Settings on page 217. N/A THEN set CLCG MU LUN to 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 NotEquipped

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 216

9218/9228 MACRO HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP, Continued


Apply BTS Primary RF Path Map Settings Follow this procedure to apply the BTS Primary RF Path Map settings. CAUTION: When writing data files to the backplane, any calibration values defined in the existing port map may be over written. See Save Original BTS Primary RF Path Map on page 194 for details on saving existing data. CAUTION: Applying BTS Primary RF Path Map may require Re-calibrating the cell. See Step 4 below. Step 1 Action Click Apply from the BTS Primary RF Path Map Window. IF ... More that 1 URC is present in the frame. Only 1 URC is present in the frame 2 THEN ... Proceed to Step 2. Proceed to Step 3.

Click Confirm in the Synchronized EEPROM Write window.

NOTE: RMT checks for the existence of other equipped URCs and prompt the user to update the backplane. Verify that all equipped URCs (including Spare URC) are shown and checked (). 3 Proceed to FINAL PROCEDURES on page 292.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 217

9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION
Section Description This section describes the procedures to verify and edit the Primary BTS RF Path Map on the following products: R29 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA Configurations are defined as lineups that support the R29 interface between the digital shelf and the 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A frame. R29 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA Configurations include the following lineups: o 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-D o 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-HD o 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-M4

Update the Primary BTS RF Path Map requires the use of the Remote Maintenance Tool (RMT). The procedures specified herein are to be performed if: Do Not Use This Section for PreR29 HD Configurations Updates are needed to the existing backplane parameters (i.e. HD conversion, during carrier growth, or 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA installation, or radio growth scenarios); Problems occur during the integration process of the cell equipment.

This section cannot be used to update the BTS Primary RF Path Map for Pre-R29 9218 Macro HD configurations. Use 9218/9228 MACRO HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP procedures starting on page 191 to program the BTS Primary RF Path Map for these configurations: 9218 Macro HD or 9228 Macro HD connected to: o S2 LAF frame o Pre-R29 9228 Macro MCPA-A frame (without filters) Pre-R29 9228 Macro MCPA-A (without filters) configurations are defined as configurations where the S2 LAF frame has been replaced with an 9228 Macro MCPA-A frame but the digital shelf has not been reconfigured to support the R29 interface between the digital shelf and the 9228 Macro MCPA-A frame. o Pre-R29 9228 Macro MCPA-A frame (with filters) Pre-R29 9228 Macro MCPA-A (with filters) configurations are defined as configurations where the S2 LAF and AIF frames have been replaced with an 9228 Macro MCPA-A frame with filters but the digital shelf has not been reconfigured to support the R29 interface between the digital shelf and the 9228 Macro MCPA-A frame.

When to Update the BTS Primary RF Path Map

BTS Primary RF Path Maps are set in the factory based on the cabinet configuration and equipage. If problems are experienced during the integration efforts related to the BTS RF Primary Path Map and/or when field changes are made to the cabinet, use the following procedures to update the path map information. This section gives instructions for populating each field of the BTS Primary RF Path Map. The procedures outlined in this section are supported with the .xml files packaged in the Configuration Aid (CA 100) document. The CA 100 document is available through the AlcatelLucent Customer Information Center (CIC) see CONFIGURATION AID (CA100) INSTALLATION on page 14 for information on accessing and loading this document. The CA 100 document includes: The various cell configurations, Configuration overview, Schematics, Backplane programming information, Applicable RF power calibration sections, and Packaged XML files.

Configuration Aid Document (CA 100)

Continued on next page Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 218

9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Test Equipment Information MCR Connections The following provides test equipment information that pertains to the 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA configurations. The MCR transmits through a Duplex 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A Filter. The MCR supports both Antenna Test and Pilot Power Measurements (PPM). The following ports on the MCR are used for these functions: MCR Port RC1 RC2 TONE 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA Duplex Filter Connection J41 N/A J41 Function Pilot Power Measurements N/A Antenna Test

NOTE: CLGC is not supported. Antenna Tests are not supported on UCRs. Save Original BTS Primary RF Path Map Follow this procedure to save the original BTS Primary RF Path Map. NOTE: It is highly recommended to save the original factory BTS Primary RF Path Map because it may contain calibration data or for back out procedures. Step 1 Action Click Config RF Calibration BTS Primary RF Path Map, from the RMT main screen. A window appears as shown below.

Figure 91: BTS Primary RF Path Map (example)


2 Select Common Data from the Version box at the top of the window.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 219

9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Save Original BTS Primary RF Path Map (continued)
Step 3 Select the URC. IF saving Path Map for URC1 URC2 URC3 THEN set Select the URC you want to update to 1 2 3 Action

Click Save in the Configuration File Box to save a copy of the current Primary RF Path Map. NOTE: After clicking Save, type the filename as shown below and save it to a directory as desired. Refer to SAVE CONFIGURATION FILE on page 285 for procedures to create a directory to store files. Cell x Original Radio Path Map where x = Cell Number

Verify Port Map Version

Follow this procedure to verify the Port Map Version is set to 1. NOTE: The Port Map Version for all URCs must be set to 1. Step 1 Action Determine the current Port Map Version. NOTE: The Port Map Version is located on the top right of the BTS Primary RF Path Map screen. See Figure 91 on page 219. Update the Port Map Version as needed. IF the Port Map Version is 0 1 THEN Proceed to CHANGING PORT MAP VERSIONS on page 290 to change the Port Map Version to 1. Proceed to Step 3.

Proceed to Step 3.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 220

9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Filter Panel Numbering (Tx) The figure below illustrates the filter numbering for 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA Duplex configurations. Identify the filter location and configuration for each radio before continuing with this section. The BTS 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA product may have in the same configuration: 850 (Voice and EVDO) radios transmitting through an 850 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A (MCPA), PCS (Voice and Data) radios transmitting through separate PCS 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A. The illustration shows an 850 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A example. A PCS 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A frame will not have separate Band Pass Filters assemblies, but the frame layout is the same as far as filter shelf / panel numbering.

MCPA-A Duplex Filter Config

NOTE: Each physical Filter Panel contains two logical duplex filters

Gamma - Shelf 3

Band Pass Filter NOTE: In the Duplex filter configuration, filter 1 (left side) is used for the TX / RX0 function and filter 2 (right side) is used for the RX1 function. } DX/RX Filter Panel (1 & 2)

Beta - Shelf 2

Band Pass Filter } DX/RX Filter Panel (1 & 2)

Alpha - Shelf 1

Band Pass Filter } DX/RX Filter Panel (1 & 2)

Figure 92: Filter Panel Numbering (Tx) Continued on next page Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 221

9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Filter Panel Numbering Simplex Configuration The figure below illustrates the filter numbering for 9228 Macro MCPA Simplex configurations. The Simplex filter configuration is ONLY available for 850 MCPA-A frames (not PCS). Identify the filter location and configuration for each radio before continuing with this section.

MCPA-A Simplex Filter Config

NOTE: Each physical Filter Panel contains two logical duplex filters Gamma - Shelf 3

NOTE: In the Simplex filter configuration, filter 1 (lower panel, left filter) is used for the TX function, filter 3 (upper panel, left filter) is used for the RX0 function, and filter 4 (upper panel, right filter) is used for the RX1 function.

} RX0/RX1 Filter Panel (3 & 4)

} TX Filter Panel (1 & 2)

Beta - Shelf 2

} RX0/RX1 Filter Panel (3 & 4) } TX Filter Panel (1 & 2)

Alpha - Shelf 1

} RX0/RX1 Filter Panel (3 & 4) } TX Filter Panel (1 & 2)

Figure 93: Filter Panel Numbering (Simplex Filter Configuration) Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 222

9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Configure and Update BTS Primary RF Path Map Use procedures below when you do not have a BTS Primary RF Path Map XML file and need to create that file based on cell specific configuration. In order to fully configure and update the BTS Primary RF Path Map the following sections must be completed: Common Data TX1 Radio Settings Common Data TX2 Radio Settings Common Data RX1 Radio Settings Common Data RX2 Radio Settings Update LAM Parameters Misc. Parameters Apply BTS Primary RF Path Map Settings

Common Data TX1 Radio Settings

Follow this procedure to set the TX1 Radio settings for each radio. Each radio has its own RF path and therefore BTS Primary RF Path Map settings are unique.

Step 1 2

Action On the BTS Primary RF Path Map screen, place a checkmark ( ) for each equipped radio (Radio Number 1 through 6). Verify TX1 B3 Cal Gain value is between 41 and 53. IF TX1 B3 Cal Gain is Outside of range NOTE: After completing this section, RF Power Calibration is needed. AND the TX1 Port is Used THEN set TX1 B3 Cal Gain to 48.00

Not used

44.00

In range 3 Set the TX1 Antenna value.

N/A

Proceed to Step 4.

IF the Radio TX1 Port is transmitting through ... 850 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A frame or Single Band PCS line-up Dual Band PCS line-up

THEN set TX1 Antenna to 1

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 223

9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Common Data TX1 Radio Settings (continued)
Step 4 5 Set the TX1 FP Type to McpaFP. Determine TX1 Digital Shelf value. IF the Digital Shelf is ... 850 or Single Band PCS Primary 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-D Dual Band PCS in the 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-D or Growth 1 Dual Band PCS Growth 2 Dual Band PCS Growth 3 6 Determine TX1 Filter Shelf value. IF the Radio is transmitting through ... Alpha Sector Beta Sector Gamma Sector 7 8 9 10 Set the TX1 Filter Panel setting to 1. Set the TX1 RF Path to 1. Set the TX1 Coupler Type to Default. Proceed to Common Data TX2 Radio Settings on page 225. THEN set TX1 Filter Shelf to ... 1 2 3 THEN set TX2 Digital Shelf to ... Primary Action

Growth-1 Growth -2 Growth -3

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 224

9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Common Data TX2 Radio Settings Follow this procedure to set the Radios TX2 values. Each radio has its own RF path and therefore BTS Primary RF Path Map settings are unique. NOTE: Current 9228 Macro MCPA configurations do not typically use the TX2 port. PCS digital shelves will not use the TX2 port. 850 digital shelves with six MCRs will only use the TX2 port for (9) carrier configuration in the A-Band. Action Verify TX2 B3 Cal Gain value is between 41 and 53. IF TX2 B3 Cal Gain is Outside of range NOTE: After completing this section, RF Power Calibration is needed. In range 2 3 AND the TX2 Port is Used Not used N/A THEN set TX2 B3 Cal Gain to 48.00 44.00 Proceed to Step 2.

Step 1

IF there is no cable on the TX2 port of the radio, skip to Step 11. Set the TX2 Antenna value. IF the Radio TX2 Port is Transmitting Through ... 850 9228 Macro MCPA-A frame in a 9-carrier Aband configuration Any other 850 or PCS configuration THEN Set TX2 Antenna to 1 TX2 not supported in this configuration. Verify cell configuration with customer (see note on top of page).

NOTE: Refer to Figure 92 (Duplex) and Figure 93 (Simplex) for information on the 850 filter configurations (PCS filters are always in a Duplex configuration). 4 Follow the table below to determine the Filter Type setting: IF TX2 port is cabled to An 9228 Macro MCPA-A filter panel.. N/A (or is not cabled) THEN set Filter Type to McpaFP NoFilterPanel

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 225

9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Common Data TX2 Radio Settings (continued)

Step 5

Action Determine the TX2 Digital Shelf value. IF the Digital Shelf is ... 850 or Single Band PCS Primary 9228 Macro MCPA-D Dual Band PCS in the 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-D or Growth 1 Dual Band PCS Growth 2 Dual Band PCS Growth 3 850 or PCS, and the TX2 port is not cabled THEN set TX2 Digital Shelf to ... Primary Growth-1 Growth-2 Growth-3 Local

Determine TX2 Filter Shelf value. IF the Radio is transmitting through ... Alpha Sector Beta Sector Gamma Sector N/A (or is not cabled) THEN set TX2 Filter Shelf to ... 1 2 3 NoFilterPanel

Set the TX2 Filter Panel value. IF the TX2 port is cabled to A 9228 Macro MCPA-A filter panel N/A (or is not cabled) THEN set TX2 Filter Panel to 1 0

8 9 10

Set the TX2 RF Path value to 1. Set the TX2 Coupler Type value to Default. Proceed to Common Data RX1 Radio Settings on page 228.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 226

9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Filter Panel Layout (Rx) The figure below illustrates the filter layout for 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA configurations. NOTE: The MCR Rx cable will connect to J5 (RX0) and J25 (RX1) for the receive paths. (The 850 radio could be a UCR)

J5
Figure 94: 850 Filter Panel Layout (Rx)

J25

J5
Figure 95: PCS Filter Panel Layout (Rx)

J25

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 227

9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Common Data RX1 Radio Settings Follow this procedure to set the RX1 Radio values.

Step 1 Determine the RX1 B2 Cal value. IF the Digital Shelf is 850 and directly adjacent to the Amplifiers 850 and Not adjacent PCS and directly adjacent to the Amplifiers PCS and Not adjacent 2 Determine the RX1 Antenna value.

Action

THEN set RX1 B2 Cal Loss to 5.7 6.4 6.5 7.6

IF the Digital Shelf is 850 or Single Band PCS 9228 Marcor MCPS-A lineup Dual Band PCS 9228 Macro MCPA-A lineup

THEN set RX1 Antenna to 1

3 4

Determine the RX1 FP Type to McpaFP. Determine the RX1 Digital Shelf value. IF the Digital Shelf is ... 850 or PCS Single Band Primary 9228 Macro MCPA-D frame Dual Band PCS 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-D or Growth 1 Dual Band PCS Growth 2 Dual Band PCS Growth 3 THEN set RX1 Digital Shelf to ... Primary Growth-1 Growth-2 Growth-3

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 228

9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Common Data RX1 Radio Settings (continued)
Step 5 Action Determine the RX1 Filter Shelf value. IF the Radio is receiving through ... Alpha Sector Beta Sector Gamma Sector 6 7 8 9 10 Set the RX1 Filter Panel value to 1. Set the RX1 RF Path to 1. Set RX1 EAC to Rear EAC/Zero. Set the RX1 FP Connector to J5/J25. Proceed to Common Data RX2 Radio Settings on page 230. THEN set RX1 Filter Shelf to ... 1 2 3

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 229

9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Common Data RX2 Radio Settings Follow this procedure to determine the RX2 settings for each radio.

Step 1 Determine the RX2 B2 Cal value. IF the Digital Shelf is 850 and directly adjacent to the Amplifiers 850 and Not adjacent PCS and directly adjacent to the Amplifiers PCS and Not adjacent 2 Determine the RX2 Antenna value.

Action

THEN set RX2 B2 Cal Loss to 5.7 6.4 6.5 7.6

IF the Radio RX2 Port is Connected To .... 850 9228 MCPA-A frame with Duplex filter configuration or PCS 9228 MCPA-A frame (non dual-band lineup) 850 9228 MCPA-A with Simplex Filter Configuration or PCS 9228 MCPA-A frame filters (dual-band lineup) or PCS Mod 4.0B Dual-Duplex Filters (dual-band lineup) PCS filters (dual-band lineup) where the 850 side is equipped with 9228 MCPA-A with Simplex Filter Configuration.

THEN Set RX1 Antenna to 2

NOTE: Refer to Figure 92 (Duplex) and Figure 93 (Simplex) for information on the 850 filter configurations (PCS filters are always in a Duplex configuration) 3 4 Set the RX2 FP Type to McpaFP. Determine the RX2 Digital Shelf value. IF the Digital Shelf is ... 850 or PCS Single Band Primary 9228 Macro MCPA-D frame Dual Band PCS 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-D or Growth 1 Dual Band PCS Growth 2 Dual Band PCS Growth 3 THEN set RX1 Digital Shelf to ... Primary Growth-1 Growth-2 Growth-3

Continued on next page Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 230

9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Common Data RX2 Radio Settings (continued)
Step 5 Action Determine the RX2 Filter Shelf value. IF the Radio is receiving through ... Alpha Sector Beta Sector Gamma Sector 6 7 8 9 10 Set the RX2 Filter Panel to 2. Set RX2 RF Path to 1. Set RX2 EAC to Rear EAC/Zero. Set the RX2 FP Connector value to J5/J25. Proceed to Update LAM Parameters on next page. THEN set RX2 Filter Shelf to ... 1 2 3

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 231

9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Update LAM Parameters Follow this procedure below to configure the LAM Parameters. Step 1 Select LAM Parms. NOTE: All 9228 Macro MCPA Primary Path Maps should be set the same, shown in the example below. Action

Figure 96: LAM Parms Screen (example)

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 232

9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Update LAM Parameters (continued)
Step 2 3 4 Set the TX1 Targ Pwr Offset to 0. Set TX1 LAM1 DSN through TX1 LAM6 DSN to 0. Set the TX1 Lam1 through Lam4 LUN values as follows: Action

IF the Radios TX1 port is connected to Sector 1 (Alpha) Subrack

THEN use TX1 Lam1 LUN = 1 TX1 Lam2 LUN = 2 TX1 Lam3 LUN = 3 TX1 Lam4 LUN = 4 TX1 Lam1 LUN = 5 Tx1 Lam2 LUN = 6 Tx1 Lam3 LUN = 7 TX1 Lam4 LUN = 8 TX1 Lam1 LUN = 9 TX1 Lam2 LUN = 10 Tx1 Lam3 LUN = 11 TX1 Lam4 LUN = 12

Sector 2 (Beta) Sub-rack

Sector 3 (Gamma) Subrack

Set the following to 0xff: TX1 Lam5 LUN TX1 Lam6 LUN Set the TX2 Target Pwr Offset to 0. Set TX2 LAM1 DSN through TX2 LAM6 DSN to 0.

6 7

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 233

9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Update LAM Parameters (continued)
Step 8 Action Set the TX2 Lam1 through Lam4 LUN values as follows: IF the Radios TX2 port is connected to Sector 1 (Alpha) Sub-rack

THEN use TX2 Lam1 LUN = 1 TX2 Lam2 LUN = 2 TX2 Lam3 LUN = 3 TX2 Lam4 LUN = 4 TX2 Lam1 LUN = 5 Tx2 Lam2 LUN = 6 Tx2 Lam3 LUN = 7 TX2 Lam4 LUN = 8 TX2 Lam1 LUN = 9 TX2 Lam2 LUN = 10 Tx2 Lam3 LUN = 11 TX2 Lam4 LUN = 12

Sector 2 (Beta) Sub-rack

Sector 3 (Gamma) Sub-rack

Set the following to 0xff: TX2 Lam5 LUN TX2 Lam6 LUN Proceed to Misc. Parameters on the next page.

10

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 234

9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Misc. Parameters Follow this procedure to set the Miscellaneous Parameters. Step 1 Select Misc Parms Action

Figure 97: Misc Parms Screen (example)


2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Set TX1 Conv UN to 0xff. Set TX2 Conv UN to 0xff. Set RX1 Conv UN to 0xff. Set RX2 Conv UN to 0xff. Set TX1 MCA DS Gain to 0.0. Set TX2 MCA DS Gain to 0.0. Set PAF to Alpha Radio 1 & 4, Beta Radio 2 & 5, Gamma Radio 3 & 6.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 235

9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Misc. Parameters (continued)
Step 9 Action Determine the Ant Test MU Type values. IF Radio is ... UCR MCR Not equipped THEN use ... NotEquipped Radio NotEquipped

10

Determine the Ant Test MU LUN values. IF the Ant Test MU Type is set to Radio is in slot 1 Radio (MCR) 2 3 4 Radio (MCR) 5 6 4 Radio (MCR) 5 6 NotEquipped (UCR OR no radio present) N/A N/A UCRs in slots 1, 2, 3 MCRs in slots 1, 2, 3 AND N/A N/A N/A THEN set Ant Test MU LUN to 1 2 3 NotEquipped NotEquipped NotEquipped 4 5 6 NotEquipped

11 12 13 14 15 16 17

Set the CLGC MU Type to NotEquipped. Set CLCG MU LUN to NotEquipped. Set DPD MU Type to NotEquipped. Set DPD MU LUN to NotEquipped. Set the PPM MU Type to match the Ant Test MU Type. Set the PPM MU LUN to match the Ant Test MU LUN. Proceed to Apply BTS Primary RF Path Map Settings on the next page.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 236

9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Apply BTS Primary RF Path Map Settings Follow this procedure to apply the BTS Primary RF Path Map settings. CAUTION: When writing data files to the backplane, any calibration values defined in the existing port map may be over written. See Save Original BTS Primary RF Path Map on page 219 for details on saving existing data. CAUTION: Applying BTS Primary RF Path Map may require Re-calibrating the cell. Step 1 Action Click Apply from the BTS Primary RF Path Map Window. IF ... More that 1 URC is present in the frame. Only 1 URC is present in the frame 2 THEN ... Proceed to Step 2. Proceed to Step 3.

Click Confirm in the Synchronized EEPROM Write window.

NOTE: RMT checks for the existence of other equipped URCs and prompt the user to update the backplane. Verify that all equipped URCs (including Spare URC) are shown and checked (). 3 Proceed to FINAL PROCEDURES on page 292.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 237

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD)
Section Description This section describes the procedures to verify and edit the Primary BTS RF Path Map on the following products: 9218 Base Station Macro, 9228 Base Station Macro, 9216 Base Station Compact, 9226 Compact, 9216 Base Station Compact Distributed 850 MHz 9216 Base Station Compact 450 MHz, 9216 Base Station Compact Distributed 450 MHz 9223 Base Station Ultra-Compact 9224 Base Station Sub-Compact (with UCRs or MCRs), 9224 Base Station Sub-Compact EN, 9228 Base Station Macro LP, 9228 Base Station Macro IN, 9222 Base Station Micro

NOTE: Do not use this section for the 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA or 9128/9228 Base Station Macro HD frame configurations. Refer to Connect with RMT on page 190 (step 3) to select the appropriate section for these frames.

When to Update the BTS Primary RF Path Map

BTS Primary RF Path Maps are set in the factory based on the cabinet configuration and equipage. If problems are experienced during the integration efforts related to the BTS RF Primary Path Map and/or when field changes are made to the cabinet, use the following procedures to update the path map information. This section gives instructions for populating each field of the BTS Primary RF Path Map.

Configuration Aid Document (CA 100)

The procedures outlined in this section are supported with the .xml files packaged in the Configuration Aid (CA 100) document. The CA 100 document is available through the AlcatelLucent Customer Information Center (CIC) see CONFIGURATION AID (CA100) INSTALLATION on page 14 for information on accessing and loading this document. The CA 100 document includes: The various cell configurations, Configuration overview, Schematics, Backplane programming information, Applicable RF power calibration sections, and Packaged XML files.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 238

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Test Equipment Information TDU Numbering The following provides test equipment information that pertains to the various Modcell configurations. A frame can be equipped with the two TDUs (TDU 1 and TDU 2). TDU 1 is used for antenna tests while TDU 2 is used for Closed Loop Gain Control (CLGC). RMT does not reference TDUs in the same manner as ECP Database translations. See the table below. This Handbook section follows the RMT convention and refers to the TDUs in a frame as TDU 1 or TDU 2. Frame Primary RMT Reference 1 2 Growth #1 1 2 Growth #2 1 2 Growth #3 Database Translation Reference 1 2 5 6 9 10 Function Antenna Test CLGC Antenna Test CLGC Antenna Test CLGC

Not Applicable. TDUs are not support in a Growth #3 frame.

TDU Connections

TDU 1 connects to the J2 & J3 ports for Duplex and Triplex filters, or to the J41 port for Dual Duplex filters. TDU 2 connects to the external coupler on the filter for Duplex and Triplex filters, or to the J11 & J31 ports for Dual Duplex filters.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 239

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
MCR Connections For RF paths, the MCR connects to a Dual-Duplex Filter, a Dual-Quadruplex Filter or a DualTriplex Filter. The MCR supports both Antenna Test and Closed Loop Gain Control (CLGC). The following ports on the MCR are used for these functions: MCR Port Filter Type Dual-Duplex RC1 Dual-Triplex Dual-Quadruplex Dual-Duplex RC2 Dual-Triplex Dual-Quadruplex TONE All Filter Port J11 J11 for PCS, J12 for G-Block J11 for PCS, K11 for AWS J31 J31 for PCS, J32 for G-Block J31 for PCS, K31 for AWS J41 Antenna Test CLGC (for Tx2 port) CLGC (for Tx1 port) Function

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 240

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Filter Panel Numbering (Tx) The figure below illustrates the filter numbering for Duplex, Triplex and Dual Duplex configurations. Identify the filter location and configuration for each radio before continuing with this section. NOTE: Figure 98 is continued on the next page.

Alpha Div 0

Alpha Div 1

Beta Div 0

Beta Div 1

Gamma Div 0

Gamma Div 1

Duplex or Triplex Filter Panels (3 Sectors)

Filter 1 J8 J9

Filter 2 J8 J9

Filter 3 J8 J9

Filter 4 J8 J9

Filter 5 J8 J9

Filter 6 J8 J9

Slot 1

Slot 2

Slot 3

Slot 4

Slot 5

Slot 6

Alpha

Beta

Gamma

Dual Duplex Filter Panels (3 Sector)

Filter 1 Div 0 J8

Filter 2 Div 1 J28

Filter 3 Div 0 J8

Filter 4 Div 1 J28

Filter 5 Div 0 J8

Filter 6 Div 1 J28

Slot 1

Slot 2

Slot 3

Figure 98: Filter Panel Numbering (Tx) Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 241

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Filter Panel Numbering (Tx) (continued)
Alpha Beta Div 1 Div 0 Div 1 Div 0 Gamma Div 1

9228 Macro / 9226 Compact 9222 Micro / 9224 Sub-Compact 9224 Sub-Compact EN Dual Duplex Filter Panels ( 3 Sector) (1 Sector for 9222 Micro)

Div 0

J8

J28

J8

J 28

J8

J 28

Slot 1

Slot 2

Slot 3

Alpha Div 0 Div 1 Div 0

Beta Div 1 Div 0

Gamma Div 1

9228 Macro Dual Duplex Filter Panels ( 6 Sector)

J8

J 28

J8

J 28

J8

J 28

Slot 1
J28 J8 J 28

Slot 2
J8 J 28

Slot 3
J8

Div 1 Delta

Div 0

Div 1 Epsilon

Div 0

Div 1 Zeta

Div 0

Slot 4

Slot 5

Slot 6

9228 Macro Dual Duplex Filter Panels (Lineups with Intelligent Antenna- IA)

Alpha Div 0 Div 1 Div 0

Beta Div 1 Div 0

Gamma Div 1

J8 : Outdoor frame with slot 4/5/6 Filters installed upside-down shown. Indoor frames will have the slot 4/5/6. filters installed with the same orientation as slots 1/2/3. Be sure to use the filter labels to determine correct settings.

J 28

J8

J 28

J8

J 28

Slot 1
J28 J8 J 28

Slot 2
J8 J 28

Slot 3
J8

Div 1 Alpha

Div 0

Div 1 Beta

Div 0

Div 1 Gamma

Div 0

Slot 4

Slot 5

Slot 6

Alpha Div 0 Div 1 Div 0

Beta Div 1 Div 0

Gamma Div 1

J8

J28

J8

J28

J8

J 28

9228 Macro IN 9228 Macro LP Dual Duplex Filter Panels ( 3 Sector)


Div 0

Slot 1
Alpha Div 1 Div 0

Slot 2
Beta Div 1 Div 0

Slot 3
Gamma Div 1

J8

J28

J8

J28

J8

J 28

Slot 4

Slot 5

Slot 6

For three sector cell sites Filters are numbered . 1 through 6 from left to right, regardless if they are in a primary or growth frame. For six sector, Intelligent Antenna IA, 9228 Macro LP and 9228 Macro IN cell sites, filters are numbered 1 through 12.

Figure 94: Filter Panel Numbering (Tx), Contd Continued on next page Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 242

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Filter Panel Numbering (Tx) (continued)
9228 Macro LP AWS 2-Watt Composite Dual Duplex Filter Panels (3 Sector)
Alpha Filter 1 Div 0 Filter 2 Div 1 Filter 3 Div 0 Beta Filter 4 Div 1 Filter 5 Div 0 Gamma Filter 6 Div 1

J8

J28

J8

J28

J8

J 28

Slot 4

Slot 5
Epsilon Filter 9 Filter 10 Div 0 Div 1

Slot 6

Delta

Zeta Filter 11 Div 0 Filter 12 Div 1

9228 Macro LP AWS 2-Watt Composite Dual Duplex Filter Panels (6 Sector)

Filter 7 Div 0

Filter 8 Div 1

J8

J28

J8

J28

J8

J 28

Slot 1
Alpha Filter 1 Div 0 Filter 2 Div 1 Filter 3 Div 0

Slot 2
Beta Filter 4 Div 1 Filter 5 Div 0

Slot 3
Gamma Filter 6 Div 1

J8

J28

J8

J28

J8

J 28

Slot 4

Slot 5

Slot 6

9228 Macro Dual-band AWS or G-Block Dual Triplex Filter Panels (3 Sector)

Alpha

Beta

Gamma

Filter 1 Div 0 J8 J9

Filter 2 Div 1 J28 J29

Filter 3 Div 0 J8 J9

Filter 4 Div 1 J28 J29

Filter 5 Div 0 J8 J9

Filter 6 Div 1 J28 J29

Slot 1

Slot 2

Slot 3

9228 Macro Dual-band AWS Dual Quadraplex Filter Panels (3 Sector)

Alpha

Beta

Gamma

Filter 1 Div 0 J8 K8

Filter 2 Div 1 J28 K28

Filter 3 Div 0 J8 K8

Filter 4 Div 1 J28 K28

Filter 5 Div 0 J8 K8

Filter 6 Div 1 J28 K28

Slot 1
Alpha Beta
Filter 3 Div 0 J8 K8 Filter 4 Div 1 J28 K28

Slot 2
Gamma
Filter 5 Div 0 J8 K8 Filter 6 Div 1 J28 K28

Slot 3
Delta
Filter 7 Div 0 J8 K8 Filter 8 Div 1 J28 K28

Epsilon
Filter 9 Filter 10 Div 0 J8 K8 Div 1 J28 K28

Zeta
Filter 11 Filter 12 Div 0 J8 K8 Div 1 J28 K28

9228 Macro Dual-band AWS Dual Quadraplex Filter Panels (6 Sector)

Filter 1 Div 0 J8 K8

Filter 2 Div 1 J28 K28

Slot 1

Slot 2 Growth Frame

Slot 3

Slot 1

Slot 2 Primary Frame

Slot 3

NOTE: For 3 sector cell sites, filters are numbered 1 through 6 from left . to right. For 6 sector 9228 Macro Pri. + 9228 Macro Growth Dual-band (PCS/AWS), filters are numbered 1 through 12.

Figure 94: Filter Panel Numbering (Tx), Contd Continued on next page Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 243

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Save Original BTS Primary RF Path Map Follow this procedure to save the original BTS Primary RF Path Map. NOTE: It is highly recommended to save the original factory BTS Primary RF Path Map because it may contain calibration data or for back out procedures. Step 1 2 Connect with RMT. Click Config RF Calibration BTS Primary RF Path Map, from the RMT main screen. A window appears as shown below. Action

Figure 99: BTS Primary RF Path Map (example)


3 Select Common Data from the Version box at the top of the window.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 244

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Save Original BTS Primary RF Path Map (continued)
Step 4 Select the URC. IF saving Path Map for URC1 URC2 URC3 THEN set Select the URC you want to update to 1 2 3 Action

Click Save in the Configuration File Box to save a copy of the current Primary RF Path Map. NOTE: After clicking Save, type the filename as shown below and save it to a directory as desired. Refer to SAVE CONFIGURATION FILE on page 285 for procedures to create a directory to store files. Cell x Original Radio Path Map where x = Cell Number

Verify Port Map Version

Follow this procedure to verify the Port Map Version is set to 1. NOTE: The Port Map Version for all URCs must be set to 1. Step 1 Action Determine the current Port Map Version. NOTE: The Port Map Version is located on the top right of the BTS Primary RF Path Map screen. Refer to Figure 99 on page 244. Update the Port Map Version as needed. IF the Port Map Version is 0 1 3 THEN Proceed to CHANGING PORT MAP VERSIONS on page 290 to change the Port Map Version to 1. Proceed to Step 3.

Proceed to Step 3.

Proceed to How to Recall A BTS Primary RF Path Map XML File on the next page.

Continued on next page Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 245

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
How to Recall A BTS Primary RF Path Map XML File This procedure below is used during field installation upgrades with the XML files that are packaged with the CA 100 document or with a known good XML file.

Step 1

Action Open the BTS Primary RF Path Map window (if it is not already open) from the RMT main menu select: Config RF Calibration BTS Primary RF Path Map Set the desired URC number in the field Select the URC you want to update. Click on Recall under the Configuration File heading. Check that desired configuration file is covered under the CA 100 document and/or the required file is saved on the laptop. IF ... Yes No Go to step 5. Go to Manually Configure and Update BTS Primary RF Path Map on page 248. THEN ...

2 3 4

Select the desired Primary RF Path Map XML file for the cell configuration. NOTE: Below is an example of the CA 100 file directory.

Go to Apply BTS Primary RF Path Map Settings on the page 247.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 246

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Apply BTS Primary RF Path Map Settings Follow this procedure to apply the BTS Primary RF Path Map settings. CAUTIONS: When writing data files to the backplane, any calibration values defined in the existing port map may be over written. See Save Original BTS Primary RF Path Map on page 244 for details on saving existing data. Applying BTS Primary RF Path Map may require Re-calibrating the cell. Action Click Apply from the BTS Primary RF Path Map Window. IF ... More that 1 URC is present in the frame. Only 1 URC is present in the frame 2 THEN ... Proceed to Step 2. Proceed to Step 3.

Step 1

Click Confirm in the Synchronized EEPROM Write window.

NOTE: RMT checks for the existence of other equipped URCs and prompt the user to update the backplane. Verify that all equipped URCs are shown and checked (). 3 4 Click Cancel in the BTS Primary RF Path Map window. Proceed to FINAL PROCEDURES on page 292.

Continued on next page Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 247

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Manually Configure and Update BTS Primary RF Path Map Follow these procedures for manually configuring and updating the BTS Primary RF Path Map for the following platforms:. 9218 Base Station Macro, 9228 Base Station Macro, 9216 Base Station Compact, 9226 Compact, 9216 Base Station Compact Distributed 850 MHz 9216 Base Station Compact 450 MHz, 9216 Base Station Compact Distributed 450 MHz 9224 Base Station Sub-Compact (with UCRs or MCRs), 9224 Base Station Sub-Compact EN, 9228 Base Station Macro LP, 9228 Base Station Macro IN, 9222 Base Station Micro

NOTE: Do not use this section for the 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA or 9128/9228 Base Station Macro HD frame configurations. Refer to Connect with RMT on page 190 (step 3) to select the appropriate section for these frames.

Common Data TX1 Radio Settings

Follow this procedure to set the TX1 Radio settings for each radio. Each radio has its own RF path and therefore BTS Primary RF Path Map settings are unique.

Step 1

Action On the BTS Primary RF Path Map screen, place a checkmark ( ) for each equipped radio (Radio Number 1through 6). NOTE: Fields for unequipped radios are automatically set to their default values by RMT during the write operation (i.e. after clicking Apply). Verify TX1 B3 Cal Gain value is between 35 and 48. IF TX1 B3 Cal Gain is Outside of range THEN Set TX1 B3 Cal Gain to 44.00. NOTE: After completing this section, RF Power Calibration is needed. Proceed to Step 3.

In range

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 248

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Common Data TX1 Radio Settings (continued)
Step 3 Set the TX1 Antenna value. IF the frame is 9228 Macro - Dual Band (PCS/AWS) 4 - 6 Sector (Primary with Growth-1) AND the Radios TX1 port is transmitting through Diversity 0 Filter in either Primary or Growth-1 Diversity 1 Filter in either Primary or Growth-1 Diversity 0 or 1 Diversity 0 Filter in Growth-1 Diversity 1 Filter in Growth-1 Diversity 0 Filter in Growth-1 Diversity 1 Filter in Growth-1 Diversity 0 Filter in Growth-1 Diversity 1 Filter in Growth-1 Diversity 0 Diversity 1 Diversity 0 Filter in Slot 1, 2, or 3 (Filter 1, 3, or 5) Diversity 0 Filter in Slot 4, 5, or 6 (Filter 7, 9, or 11) THEN set to 1 2 1 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 1 3 Action

9228 Macro - Dual Band (PCS/AWS) Single Frame 9228 Macro - Dual Band (PCS/AWS) 1 - 3 Sector (Primary with Growth-1) 9228 Macro Dual Band (PCS/AWS) Growth 1 with M 1/2/3 PCS Primary 9228 Macro Dual Band (PCS/G-Block) 1 3 Sector (Primary with Growth 1) 9228 Macro - Dual Band (PCS/G-Block) Single Frame 9228 Macro - Primary (with Intelligent Antenna Calibration Unit (IACU))

NOTE: Refer to Figure 100 on page 259 for information on filter configurations.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 249

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Common Data TX1 Radio Settings (continued)
Step 3 Action Set the TX1 Antenna value (continued). IF the frame is 9228 Macro - PCS Growth-1 (with IACU equipped in the 9228 Macro - 850 Primary Frame) 9228 Macro IN or 9228 Macro LP (Dual Band) AND the Radios TX1 port is transmitting through Diversity 0 Filter in Slot 1, 2, or 3 (Filter 1, 3, or 5) THEN set to 5

No Filter (or is not used) 850 Diversity 0 Filter 850 Diversity 1 Filter PCS Diversity 0 Filter PCS Diversity 1 Filter

1 1 2 3 4 1 1 2 3 4

9228 Macro LP (Single Band) or Any other cabinet type

No Filter (or is not used) Diversity 0 Filter in Primary Diversity 1 Filter in Primary Diversity 0 Filter in Growth-1, 2 or 3 Diversity 1 Filter in Growth-1, 2, or 3

NOTE: Refer to Figure 100 on page 259 for information on filter configurations.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 250

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Common Data TX1 Radio Settings (continued)
Step 4 Determine the TX1 FP Type value. IF the Radio is In a Primary frame AND TX1 port is transmitting through No Filter (or is not used) Modcell 3.0 Filter Dual-Duplex Filter Dual-Triplex Filter Dual-Quadruplex Filter An 850 UCR in a 9218 Macro Korean CoLocated frame In a Growth 1, 2, or 3 frame (without CLGC Ethernet Hub) THEN set TX1 FP Type to NoFilterPanel Modcell3.0 Action

... equipped in

N/A Same cabinet Either Primary or Growth frame Either Primary or Growth frame Either Primary or Growth frame

DualDuplexer

Filter

Different cabinet

Modcell2.0

No Filter (or is not used) Filter Modcell 3.0 Filter Dual-Duplex Filter Dual-Triplex Filter Dual-Quadruplex Filter

N/A Different cabinet Same cabinet Same cabinet Same cabinet Same cabinet N/A Primary frame Primary frame

NoFilterPanel NoFilterPanel Modcell3.0

DualDuplexer

In a Growth 1 frame (with CLGC Ethernet Hub)

No Filter (or is not used) Modcell 3.0 Filter Dual-Quadruplex Filter

NoFilterPanel Modcell3.0 DualDuplexer

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 251

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Common Data TX1 Radio Settings (continued)
Step 5 Determine TX1 Digital Shelf value. IF the TX1 port is transmitting through No Filter (or is not used) Filters in the Primary cabinet AND TX1 FP Type is (any setting) Modcell3.0 DualDuplexer NoFilterPanel Filters in the Growth 1 cabinet Filters in the Growth 2 cabinet Filters in the Growth 3 cabinet (any setting) (any setting) (any setting) THEN set TX1 Digital Shelf to Local Primary Primary Local Growth-1 Growth-2 Growth-3 Action

6 7

Set TX1 Filter Shelf to 1. Determine TX1 FP (Filter Panel) Number setting. IF the Radios TX1 port is transmitting through Filter in the same frame Filter in a different frame AND a CLGC Ethernet Hub is N/A Equipped Not Equipped A filter in another vendors equipment (i.e. 9218 Macro Korean Co-located cells) No Filter (or is not used) N/A THEN set TX1 FP Number to 1 12 (see NOTE below) 1 12 (see NOTE below) 0 0xff

N/A

NOTE: Use the filter number where the Radios TX1 Port is connected. Trace the cables from Radios TX1 port to the Amplifier (if equipped) and then to the Filter.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 252

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Common Data TX1 Radio Settings (continued)
Step 8 Determine the TX1 RF Path value. IF the Radios TX1 port is connected to J8 port J8 or J28 port AND Filter Type is Modcell 3.0 Duplex/Triplex Filter Dual-Duplex Filter Dual-Triplex Filter Dual-Quadruplex Filter J8, K8 or L8 (BTS9223) Not used (no connection) J9 port K8 or K28 port 9 Dual-Duplex Filter N/A Modcell 3.0 Triplex Filter 2 Dual-Quadruplex Filter 1 THEN set TX1 RF Path to Action

Determine the TX1 Coupler Type value. IF the Radios TX1 port is Supported by CLGC Not supported by CLGC Not used (no connection) THEN set TX1 Coupler Type to DPD Default Default

10

Proceed to Common Data TX2 Radio Settings on page 254.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 253

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Common Data TX2 Radio Settings Follow this procedure to set the Radios TX2 values. Each radio has its own RF path and therefore BTS Primary RF Path Map settings are unique.

Step 1

Action Verify TX2 B3 Cal Gain value is between 35 and 48. IF TX2 B3 Cal Gain is Outside of range THEN Set TX2 B3 Cal Gain to 44.00. NOTE: After completing this section, RF Power Calibration is needed. Proceed to Step 2.

In range 2 Set the TX2 Antenna value. IF the frame is 9228 Macro - Dual Band (PCS/AWS) 4 - 6 Sector (Primary or Growth-1)

AND the Radios TX2 port is transmitting through Diversity 0 Filter in either Primary or Growth-1 Diversity 1 Filter in either Primary or Growth-1 Diversity 0 or 1

THEN set to 1 2 2

9228 Macro - Dual Band (PCS/AWS) Single Frame 9228 Macro Dual Band (PCS/AWS) 1 3 Sector (Primary with Growth 1) 9228 Macro Dual Band (PCS/AWS) Growth 1 with M 1/2/3 PCS Primary 9228 Macro Dual Band (PCS/G-Block) 1 3 Sector (Primary with Growth 1) 9228 Macro - Dual Band (PCS/G-Block) Single Frame

Diversity 0 Filter in Growth-1 Diversity 1 Filter in Growth-1 Diversity 0 Filter in Growth-1 Diversity 1 Filter in Growth-1 Diversity 0 Filter in Growth-1 Diversity 1 Filter in Growth-1 Diversity 0 Diversity 1

1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2

NOTE: Refer to Figure 100 on page 259 for information on filter configurations.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 254

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Common Data TX2 Radio Settings (continued)
Step 2 Action Set the TX2 Antenna value (continued). IF the frame is 9228 Macro - Primary (with Intelligent Antenna Calibration Unit (IACU)) AND the Radios TX2 port is transmitting through Diversity 1 Filter in Slot 1, 2, or 3 (Filter 2, 4, or 6) Diversity 1 Filter in Slot 4, 5, or 6 (Filter 8, 10, or 12) 9228 Macro - PCS Growth-1 (with IACU equipped in the 9228 Macro - 850 Primary Frame) Any other cabinet type Diversity 1 Filter in Slot 1, 2, or 3 (Filter 2, 4, or 6) THEN set to 2

4 6

No Filter (or is not used) Diversity 0 Filter in Primary Diversity 1 Filter in Primary Diversity 0 Filter in Growth-1, 2 or 3 Diversity 1 Filter in Growth-1, 2, or 3

1 1 2 3 4

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 255

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Common Data TX2 Radio Settings (continued)
Step 3 Determine the TX2 FP Type value. AND TX2 port is transmitting through No Filter (or is not used) Modcell 3.0 Filter Dual-Duplex Filter Dual-Triplex Filter Dual-Quadruplex Filter An 850 UCR in a 9218 Macro Korean CoLocated frame In a Growth 1, 2, or 3 frame (without CLGC Ethernet Hub) ... equipped in N/A Same cabinet Either Primary or Growth frame Either Primary or Growth frame Either Primary or Growth frame DualDuplexer THEN set TX2 FP Type to NoFilterPanel Modcell3.0 Action

IF the Radio is In a Primary frame

Filter

Different cabinet

Modcell2.0

No Filter (or is not used) Filter (See NOTE) Modcell 3.0 Filter Dual-Duplex Filter Dual-Triplex Filter Dual-Quadruplex Filter

N/A Different cabinet Same cabinet Same cabinet Same cabinet Same cabinet N/A Primary frame Primary frame

NoFilterPanel NoFilterPanel Modcell3.0

DualDuplexer

In a Growth 1 frame (with CLGC Ethernet Hub)

No Filter (or is not used) Modcell 3.0 Filter Dual-Quadruplex Filter

NoFilterPanel Modcell3.0 DualDuplexer

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 256

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Common Data TX2 Radio Settings (continued)
Step 4 Action Determine the TX2 Digital Shelf value. IF the TX2 port is transmitting through No Filter (or is not used) Filters in the Primary cabinet AND TX2 FP Type is (any setting) Modcell3.0 DualDuplexer NoFilterPanel Filters in the Growth1 cabinet Filters in the Growth 2 cabinet Filters in the Growth 3 cabinet 5 6 Set TX2 Filter Shelf to 1. Determine the TX2 Filter Panel value. IF the Radios TX2 port is transmitting through Filter in the same frame Filter in a different frame AND a CLGC Ethernet Hub is N/A Equipped Not Equipped A filter in another vendors equipment (i.e. Korean 4.0 Colocated cells) No Filter (or is not used) N/A THEN set TX2 Filter Panel to 1 6 (for 3 Sector) 1 12 (for 6 Sector) 1 12 0 0xff (any setting) (any setting) (any setting) THEN set TX2 Digital Shelf to Local Primary Primary Local Growth-1 Growth-2 Growth-3

N/A

NOTE: Use the filter number where the Radios TX2 Port is connected. Trace the cables from Radios TX2 port to the Amplifier and then to the Filter. Refer to Figure 100 on page 259 for information on filter configurations.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 257

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Common Data TX2 Radio Settings (continued)
Step 7 Determine the TX2 RF Path value. IF the Radios TX2 port is connected to J8 port J8 or J28 port AND Filter Type is Modcell 3.0 Duplex/Triplex Filter Dual-Duplex Filter Dual-Triplex Filter Dual-Quadruplex Filter J8, K8 or L8 (BTS9223) Not used (no connection) J9 port K8 or K28 port 8 Dual-Duplex Filter N/A Modcell 3.0 Triplex Filter 2 Dual-Quadruplex Filter 1 THEN set TX2 RF Path to Action

Determine the TX2 Coupler Type value. IF the Radios TX2 port is Supported by CLGC Not supported by CLGC Not used (no connection) THEN set TX2 Coupler Type to DPD Default Default

Proceed to Common Data RX1 Radio Settings on page 262.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 258

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Filter Panel Numbering (Rx) The figure below illustrates the filter numbering for Duplex, Triplex and Dual Duplex configurations. Identify the filter location and configuration for each radio before continuing with this section. NOTE: Figure 100 is continued on the next page.

Alpha Div 0 J6

Alpha Div 1 J6 J5 J4 Filter 2

Beta Div 0 J6 J5 J4 Filter 3

Beta Div 1 J6 J5 J4 Filter 4

Gamma Div 0 J6 J5 J4 Filter 5

Gamma Div 1 J6 J5 J4 Filter 6

Duplex or Triplex Filter Panels (3 Sector)

J5 J4 Filter 1

Slot 1

Slot 2

Slot 3

Slot 4

Slot 5

Slot 6

Alpha

Beta Filter 2 Div 1 J24 J25 J26 Filter 3 Div 0 J4 J5 J6 Filter 4 Div 1 J24 J25 J26

Dual Duplex Filter Panels (3 Sector)

Filter 1 Div 0 J4 J5 J6

Gamma Filter 5 Filter 6 Div 0 Div 1 J4 J24 J5 J25 J6 J26

Slot 1

Slot 2

Slot 3

Figure 100: Filter Panel Numbering (Rx) Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 259

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued

Figure 96: Filter Panel Numbering (Rx), Cont. Continued on next page Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 260

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued

Figure 96: Filter Panel Numbering (Rx), Cont. Continued on next page Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 261

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Common Data RX1 Radio Settings Follow this procedure to set the RX1 Radio values.

Step 1 Determine the RX1 B2 Cal value.

Action

IF Radios RX1 port is connected to Dual-Duplex Filter Dual-Triplex Filter Dual-Quadruplex Filter All other filter type or No equipped filter

THEN set RX1 B2 Cal Loss to 1.5* (Use 0.7 for the 9223 UltraCompact)

5.0*

*NOTE: RMT populates the B2 value during Off-Line RMT Calibration procedures. RMT populates the B2 value based on frequency band as well as filter type. The values above are just nominal values.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 262

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Common Data RX1 Radio Settings (continued)
Step 2 Determine the RX1 Antenna value. IF the frame is 9228 Macro - Dual Band (PCS/AWS) 4 - 6 Sector (Primary or Growth-1) AND the Radios RX1 port is connected to Diversity 0 Filter in either Primary or Growth-1 Diversity 1 Filter in either Primary or Growth-1 Diversity 0 or 1 Diversity 0 Filter in Growth-1 Diversity 1 Filter in Growth-1 Diversity 0 Filter in Growth-1 Diversity 1 Filter in Growth-1 Diversity 0 Filter in Growth-1 Diversity 1 Filter in Growth-1 Diversity 0 Filter Diversity 1 Filter THEN set to 1 2 1 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 Action

9228 Macro - Dual Band (PCS/AWS) Single Frame 9228 Macro Dual Band (PCS/AWS) 1 3 Sector (Primary with Growth 1) 9228 Macro Dual Band (PCS/AWS) Growth 1 with M 1/2/3 PCS Primary 9228 Macro Dual Band (PCS/G-Block) 1 3 Sector (Primary with Growth 1) 9228 Macro - Dual Band (PCS/G-Block) Single Frame

NOTE: The RX1 port may not be connected directly to a filter. In some cases it connects to a splitter that connects to a filter (this occurs when there are more than 3 radios per sector).

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 263

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Common Data RX1 Radio Settings (continued)
Step 2 Action Determine the RX1 Antenna value.(continued).

IF the frame is 9228 Macro - Primary (with Intelligent Antenna Calibration Unit (IACU))

AND the Radios RX1 port is connected to Diversity 0 Filter in Slot 1, 2, or 3 (Filter 1, 3, or 5) Diversity 0 Filter in Slot 4, 5, or 6 (Filter 7, 9, or 11) Diversity 0 Filter in Slot 1, 2, or 3 (Filter 1, 3, or 5)

THEN set to 1 3 5

9228 Macro - PCS Growth-1 (with IACU equipped in the 9228 Macro - 850 Primary Frame) Any other cabinet type

No Filter (or is not used) Diversity 0 Filter in Primary Diversity 1 Filter in Primary Diversity 0 Filter in Growth-1, 2 or 3 Diversity 1 Filter in Growth-1, 2, or 3

1 1 2 3 4

NOTE: The RX1 port may not be connected directly to a filter. In some cases it connects to a splitter that connects to a filter (this occurs when there are more than 3 radios per sector).

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 264

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Common Data RX1 Radio Settings (continued)
Step 3 Determine the RX1 FP Type value. IF the Radio is in a Primary frame AND RX1 port is connected to No Filter (or is not used) Modcell 3.0 Filter Dual-Duplex Filter ... equipped in N/A Same cabinet Either Primary or Growth frame Either Primary or Growth frame Either Primary or Growth frame N/A Different cabinet Same cabinet Same cabinet Same cabinet Same cabinet N/A Primary frame Primary frame DualDuplexer Primary frame NoFilterPanel Modcell 3.0 DualDuplexer NoFilterPanel NoFilterPanel Modcell 3.0 DualDuplexer THEN set RX1 FP Type to NoFilterPanel Modcell3.0 Action

Dual-Triplex Filter

Dual-Quadruplex Filter Growth 1, 2, or 3 frame (without CLGC Ethernet Hub) No Filter (or is not used) Filter Modcell 3.0 Filter Dual-Duplex Filter Dual-Triplex Filter Dual-Quadruplex Filter Growth 1 frame (with CLGC Ethernet Hub) No Filter (or is not used) Modcell 3.0 Filter Dual-Duplex Filter Dual-Quadruplex Filter

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 265

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Common Data RX1 Radio Settings (continued)
Step 4 Action Determine the RX1 Digital Shelf value. IF the RX1 port is connected to No Filter (or is not used) AND RX1 FP Type is NoFilterPanel Modcell 3.0 Filters in the Primary cabinet DualDuplexer NoFilterPanel Filters in the Growth1 cabinet Filters in the Growth 2 cabinet Filters in the Growth 3 cabinet 5 Set RX1 Filter Shelf to 1. (any setting) (any setting) (any setting) THEN set RX1 Digital Shelf to Local Primary Primary Local Growth-1 Growth-2 Growth-3

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 266

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Common Data RX1 Radio Settings (continued)
Step 6 Action Determine the RX1 Filter Panel value. IF the Radios RX1 port is connected to Filters in the same frame Filters in a different frame AND a CLGC Ethernet Hub is N/A Equipped Not Equipped No Filter (or is not used) N/A THEN set RX1 Filter Panel to 1 6 (for 3 Sector) 1 12 (for 6 Sector) 1 12 0 0

NOTE: Use the filter number where the Radios RX1 port is connected. Trace the cables from the Radio RX1 port to the filter. 7 Determine RX1 RF Path to 1. IF Filter type connected to is ... Not a Dual-Quadruplex Filter a Dual-Quadruplex Filter AND the RX1 port of the Radio is connected to N/A J4,5,6 or J24,25,26 port K4,5,6 or K24,25,26 port 8 9 Set RX1 EAC to Rear EAC. Determine the RX1 FP Connector value. IF the RX1 port of the Radio is connected to No filter (or is not used) The J4 or J24 port (any filter type, in any frame) The J5 or J25 port (any filter type, in any frame) The J6 or J26 port (any filter type, in any frame) 10 THEN set RX1 FP Connector to J4/J24 J4/J24 J5/J25 J6/J26 THEN set RX1 RF Path to ... 1 1 2

Proceed to Common Data RX2 Radio Settings on page 268.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 267

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Common Data RX2 Radio Settings Follow this procedure to determine the RX2 settings for each radio.

Step 1 Determine the RX2 B2 Cal value. IF the Radios RX2 port is connected to Dual-Duplex Filter Dual-Triplex Filter Dual-Quadruplex Filter All other filter type or No equipped filter

Action

THEN set RX1 B2 Cal Loss to 1.5* (Use 0.7 for the 9223 Ultra-Compact)

5.0*

*NOTE: RMT populates the B2 value during Off-Line RMT Calibration procedures. RMT populates the B2 value based on frequency band as well as filter type. The values above are just nominal values.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 268

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Common Data RX2 Radio Settings (continued)
Step 2 Determine the RX2 Antenna value. IF the frame is 9228 Macro - Dual Band (PCS/AWS) 4 - 6 Sector (Primary or Growth-1) AND the Radios RX2 port is connected to Diversity 0 Filter in either Primary or Growth-1 Diversity 1 Filter in either Primary or Growth-1 Diversity 0 or 1 THEN set to 1 2 2 Action

9228 Macro - Dual Band (PCS/AWS) Single Frame 9228 Macro Dual Band (PCS/AWS) 1 3 Sector (Primary with Growth 1) 9228 Macro Dual Band (PCS/AWS) Growth 1 with M 1/2/3 PCS Primary 9228 Macro Dual Band (PCS/G-Block) 1 3 Sector (Primary with Growth 1) 9228 Macro - Dual Band (PCS/G-Block) Single Frame

Diversity 0 Filter in Growth-1 Diversity 1 Filter in Growth-1 Diversity 0 Filter in Growth-1 Diversity 1 Filter in Growth-1 Diversity 0 Filter in Growth-1 Diversity 1 Filter in Growth-1 Diversity 0 Filter Diversity 1 Filter

1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2

NOTE: The RX2 port may not be connected directly to a filter. In some cases it connects to a splitter that connects to a filter (this occurs when there are more than 3 radios per sector).

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 269

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Common Data RX2 Radio Settings (continued)
Step 2 Action Determine the RX2 Antenna value (continued). IF the frame is 9228 Macro - Primary (with Intelligent Antenna Calibration Unit (IACU)) AND the Radios RX2 port is connected to Diversity 1 Filter in Slot 1, 2, or 3 (Filter 2, 4, or 6) Diversity 1 Filter in Slot 4, 5, or 6 (Filter 8, 10, or 12) Diversity 1 Filter in Slot 1, 2, or 3 (Filter 2, 4, or 6) THEN set to 2 4 6

9228 Macro - PCS Growth-1 (with IACU equipped in the 9228 Macro - 850 Primary Frame) Any other cabinet type

No Filter (or is not used) Diversity 0 Filter in Primary Diversity 1 Filter in Primary Diversity 0 Filter in Growth-1, 2 or 3 Diversity 1 Filter in Growth-1, 2, or 3

1 1 2 3 4

NOTE: The RX2 port may not be connected directly to a filter. In some cases it connects to a splitter that connects to a filter (this occurs when there are more than 3 radios per sector).

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 270

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Common Data RX2 Radio Settings (continued)
Step 3 Determine RX2 FP Type setting. IF the Radio is in a Primary frame AND RX2 port is connected to No Filter (or is not used) Modcell 3.0 Filter Dual-Duplex Filter ... equipped in N/A Same cabinet Either Primary or Growth frame Either Primary or Growth frame N/A Different cabinet Same cabinet Same cabinet Same cabinet Same cabinet N/A Primary frame Primary frame DualDuplexer Primary frame NoFilterPanel Modcell 3.0 DualDuplexer NoFilterPanel NoFilterPanel Modcell 3.0 THEN set RX2 FP Type to NoFilterPanel Modcell3.0 Action

DualDuplexer

Dual-Quadruplex Filter Growth 1, 2, or 3 frame (without CLGC Ethernet Hub) No Filter (or is not used) Filter Modcell 3.0 Filter Dual-Duplex Filter Dual-Triplex Filter Dual-Quadruplex Filter Growth 1 frame (with CLGC Ethernet Hub) No Filter (or is not used) Modcell 3.0 Filter Dual-Duplexer Filter Dual-Quadruplex Filter

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 271

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Common Data RX2 Radio Settings (continued)
Step 4 Action Determine the RX2 Digital Shelf value. IF the RX2 port is connected to No Filter (or is not used) AND RX2 FP Type is NoFilterPanel Modcell 3.0 Filters in the Primary cabinet DualDuplexer NoFilterPanel Filters in the Growth1 cabinet Filters in the Growth 2 cabinet Filters in the Growth 3 cabinet 5 Set the RX2 Filter Shelf to 1. (any setting) (any setting) (any setting) THEN set RX2 Digital Shelf to Local Primary Primary Local Growth-1 Growth-2 Growth-3

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 272

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Common Data RX2 Radio Settings (continued)
Step 6 Action Determine the RX2 Filter Panel value. IF the Radios RX2 port is connected to Filters in the same frame Filters in a different frame AND a CLGC Ethernet Hub is N/A Equipped Not Equipped No Filter (or is not used) N/A THEN set RX2 Filter Panel to 1 12 16 0 0

NOTE: Use the filter number where the Radios RX2 port is connected. Trace the cables from the Radio RX2 port to the filter. 7 Determine the RX2 RF Path value. IF Filter type connected to is ... Not a Dual-Quadruplex Filter a Dual-Quadruplex Filter AND the RX2 port of the Radio is connected to N/A J4,5,6 or J24,25,26 port K4,5,6 or K24,25,26 port 8 9 Set RX2 EAC to Rear EAC. Determine the RX2 FP Connector value. IF the RX2 port of the Radio is connected to No filter (or is not used) The J4, J24, K4 or K24 port (any filter type, in any frame) The J5, J25, K5 or K25 port (any filter type, in any frame) The J6, J26, K6 or K26 port (any filter type, in any frame) 10 Proceed to Update LAM Parameters on next page. THEN set RX2 FP Connector to J4/J24 J4/J24 J5/J25 J6/J26 THEN set RX2 RF Path to ... 1 1 2

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 273

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Update LAM Parameters Follow this procedure below to configure the LAM Parameters. Step 1 Select LAM Parms. Action

Figure 101: LAM Parms Screen (example) Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 274

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Update LAM Parameters (continued)
Step 2 Action Determine the TX1 Targ Pwr Offset value. IF the cell is ... An IBS Compact 4.0 A 9228 Base Station Macro LP A Base Station 2400 (without Amp) 700 MHZ Compact 4.0B Any other configuration 3 4 Set TX1 LAM1 DSN through TX1 LAM6 DSN to 0. Determine the values for: TX1 Lam1 LUN TX1 Lam2 LUN TX1 Lam3 LUN TX! Lam4 LUN IF the Radios TX1 port is connected to Hatch Plate (or is not used) THEN use TX1 Lam1 LUN = 0xff TX1 Lam2 LUN = 0xff TX1 Lam3 LUN = 0xff TX1 Lam4 LUN = 0xff TX1 Lam1 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number TX1 Lam2 LUN = 0xff TX1 Lam3 LUN = 0xff TX1 Lam4 LUN 0xff THEN use ... Refer to the 9216 COMPACT IBS TARGET POWER OFFSET procedures on page 286. Refer to 9228 BASE STATION MACRO LP TARGET POWER OFFSET procedures on page 288. Refer to the 9222 MICRO (WITHOUT AMP) TARGET POWER OFFSET procedures on page 289. - 0.97 0

Alcatel-Lucent Amplifier (No Splitter)

NOTE: Logical Amplifier Numbering may not equal the Physical Amplifier location. Refer to the Configuration Aid (CA 100) document for specific information on Physical and Logical Amplifier Numbering for common configurations.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 275

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Update LAM Parameters (continued)
Step 4 Determine the values for (continued): TX1 Lam1 LUN TX1 Lam2 LUN TX1 Lam3 LUN TX! Lam4 LUN IF the Radios TX1 port is connected to Alcatel-Lucent Amplifier through a 1:2 Splitter THEN use TX1 Lam1 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number TX1 Lam2 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number TX1 Lam3 LUN = 0xff TX1 Lam4 LUN = 0xff TX1 Lam1 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number TX1 Lam2 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number TX1 Lam3 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number Tx1 Lam4 LUN = 0xff TX1 Lam1 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number TX1 Lam2 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number TX1 Lam3 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number Tx1 Lam4 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number Action

Alcatel-Lucent Amplifier through a 1:3 Splitter

Alcatel-Lucent Amplifier through a 1:4 Splitter

Set the following to 0xff: TX1 Lam5 LUN TX1 Lam6 LUN Set the TX2 Target Pwr Offset to 0. Set TX2 LAM1 DSN through TX2 LAM6 DSN to 0.

6 7

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 276

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Update LAM Parameters (continued)
Step 8 Determine the values for: TX2 Lam1 LUN TX2 Lam2 LUN TX2 Lam3 LUN TX2 Lam4 LUN Action

IF the Radios TX2 port is connected to Hatch Plate (or is not used)

THEN use TX2 Lam1 LUN = 0xff TX2 Lam2 LUN = 0xff TX2 Lam3 LUN = 0xff Tx2 Lam4 LUN = 0xff TX2 Lam1 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number Tx2 Lam2 LUN = 0xff Tx2 Lam3 LUN = 0xff Tx2 Lam4 LUN = 0xff TX2 Lam1 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number TX2 Lam2 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number Tx2 Lam3 LUN = 0xff Tx2 Lam4 LUN = 0xff TX2 Lam1 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number TX2 Lam2 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number TX2 Lam3 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number TX2 Lam4 LUN = 0xff TX2 Lam1 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number TX2 Lam2 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number TX2 Lam3 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number TX2 Lam4 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number

Alcatel-Lucent Amplifier (No Splitter)

Alcatel-Lucent Amplifier through a 1:2 Splitter

Alcatel-Lucent Amplifier through a 1:3 Splitter

Alcatel-Lucent Amplifier through a 1:4 Splitter

NOTE: Logical Amplifier Numbering may not equal the Physical Amplifier location. Refer to the Configuration Aid (CA 100) document for specific information on Physical and Logical Amplifier Numbering for common configurations. 9 Set the following to 0xff: TX2 Lam5 LUN TX2 Lam6 LUN Proceed to Misc. Parameters on page 278.

10

Continued on next page Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 277

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Misc. Parameters Follow this procedure to set the Miscellaneous Parameters. Step 1 Select Misc Parms. Action

Figure 102: Misc Parms Screen (example)


2 Determine the TX1 Conv UN value. IF the radio is ... An 850 UCR in a Korean 4.0 cell AND if TX1 port is being used on Radio 1 Radio 2 Radio 3 Radio 4 Radio 5 Radio 6 Any other radio and/or cell configuration N/A THEN set ... 1 2 3 4 5 6 0xff

NOTE: This field is only applicable to 9218 Macro - Korean cells. For all other cell types, including the 9228 Macro - Korean, this field is set to the default value of 0xff. (Even though initial 9216 Compact Public Safety cells have transmit converters, the default value of 0xff is used)

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 278

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Misc. Parameters (continued)
Step 3 Determine the TX2 Conv UN value. IF the cell is ... An 850 UCR in a 9218 Macro Korean cell Any other radio and/or cell configuration AND if TX2 port is being used on Radio 1 Radio 2 Radio 3 N/A THEN use ... 4 5 6 0xff Action

NOTE: This field is only applicable to 9218 Macro - Korean cell. For all other cell types, including the 9228 Macro - Korean cell, this field is set to the default value of 0xff. 4 5 6 7 8 Set RX1 Conv UN to 0xff. Set RX2 Conv UN to 0xff. Set TX1 MCA DS Gain to 0.0. Set TX2 MCA DS Gain to 0.0. Set PAF to NoPafEntered.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 279

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Misc. Parameters (continued)
Step 9 Action Determine the Ant Test MU Type values. IF Radio is ... UCR (See NOTE) AND TDU 1 is not equipped TDU 1 is equipped in the same frame TDU 1 is equipped in a different frame and a CLCG Ethernet Hub is installed TDU 1 is equipped in a different frame and a CLCG Ethernet Hub is not installed MCR in 9228 Macro LP without filters MCR in 9222 Micro (without Amp) MCR in 9228 Macro DualBand (AWS/PCS) Single frame 3 Sector MCR (in any other base station) UCR450 Not equipped N/A NotEquipped N/A NotEquipped THEN use ... NotEquipped RfTestUnit RfTestUnit

NotEquipped

PCS radio

Radio

AWS radio

NotEquipped

Filters are in the same frame Filters are in a different frame N/A N/A

Radio NotEquipped FilterPanel NotEquipped

NOTE: TDU 1 Equipage and Numbering: For UCRs, the Filter will be in the same frame as the TDU. To determine TDU 1 equipage, verify that the TDU 1 is connected to the same filters used by the UCRs. For 9228 Macro Dual-Band (AWS/PCS) Single frame 3 Sector, there is only one tone port per Dual-Quadruplex Filter, only one set of radios with the same band can perform Antenna Functional Test.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 280

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Misc. Parameters (continued)
Step 10 Action Determine the Ant Test MU LUN values. IF the Ant Test MU Type is set to RFTestUnit AND TDU1 in Primary TDU 1 in Growth 1 TDU 1 in Growth 2 Radio and the cell is a 9228 Macro IN or 9228 Macro LP or 9228 Macro Dual-Band (AWS/PCS) Radio is 1 Radio is 2 Radio is 3 Radio is 4 Radio is 5 Radio is 6 Radio in any other cell Radio is 1 or 4 Radio is 2 or 5 Radio is 3 or 6 FilterPanel Radio is 1 Radio is 2 Radio is 3 NotEquipped N/A THEN set Ant Test MU LUN to 1 5 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 1 2 3 NotEquipped

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 281

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Misc. Parameters (continued)
Step 11 Action Determine the CLGC MU Type value. IF Radio is ... A UCR AND TDU 2 is not equipped TDU 2 is equipped in the same frame TDU 2 is equipped in a different frame and a CLCG Ethernet Hub is installed TDU 2 is equipped in a different frame and a CLCG Ethernet Hub is not installed An MCR in a 9228 Macro LP without filters MCR in 9222 Micro (without Amp) An MCR in any other base station N/A THEN use ... NotEquipped RfTestUnit RfTestUnit NotEquipped NotEquipped

N/A

NotEquipped

Filters are in the same frame Filters are in a different frame and TX path is NOT supported by CLGC Ethernet hub Filters are in a different frame and TX path is supported by CLGC Ethernet hub

Radio NotEquipped Radio Radio NotEquipped

A UCR450 Not equipped

N/A N/A

NOTE: TDU 2 Equipage and Numbering: For UCRs, the Filter will be in the same frame as the TDU. To determine TDU 2 equipage, verify that the TDU 2 is connected to the same filters used by the UCRs.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 282

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Misc. Parameters (continued)
Step 12 Action Determine the CLCG MU LUN values. IF the CLCG MU Type is set to RFTestUnit AND TDU 2 in Primary TDU 2 in Growth 1 TDU 2 in Growth 2 Radio Radio is 1 Radio is 2 Radio is 3 Radio is 4 Radio is 5 Radio is 6 NotEquipped 13 14 15 16 17 Set DPD MU Type to Not Equipped. Set DPD MU LUN to Not Equipped. Set PPM MU Type to Not Equipped. Set PPM MU LUN to Not Equipped. Proceed to Apply BTS Primary RF Path Map Settings on page 284. N/A THEN set CLCG MU LUN to 2 6 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 NotEquipped

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 283

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION (NON 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA OR 9128/9228 MACRO HD), Continued
Apply BTS Primary RF Path Map Settings Follow this procedure to apply the BTS Primary RF Path Map settings. CAUTION: When writing data files to the backplane, any calibration values defined in the existing port map may be over written. See Save Original BTS Primary RF Path Map on page 244 for details on saving existing data. CAUTION: Applying BTS Primary RF Path Map may require Re-calibrating the cell. See Step 4 below. Step 1 Action Click Apply from the BTS Primary RF Path Map Window. IF ... More that 1 URC is present in the frame. Only 1 URC is present in the frame 2 THEN ... Proceed to Step 2. Proceed to Step 3.

Click Confirm in the Synchronized EEPROM Write window.

NOTE: RMT checks for the existence of other equipped URCs and prompt the user to update the backplane. Verify that all equipped URCs are shown and checked (). 3 4 Click Cancel in the BTS Primary RF Path Map window. Proceed to FINAL PROCEDURES on page 292.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 284

SAVE CONFIGURATION FILE


Save Settings Follow the procedure below to create a new folder and to save settings (i.e. xml file) to the newly created folder. Step 1 2 Action Click Save under the Configuration File box. Click the down arrow and select the Local Disk (C:) drive.

Create a new folder by clicking the Create New Folder Icon

Type a name for the folder and hit Enter. This folder can then be used to store all of the UTD, BTS Primary RF Path Map, and BTS RF Test Path Map xml files that are saved. For example you can name the folder XML Files. Double Click the folder just created in Step 4. Enter the desired filename in the File name box. Example Cell 350 Radio Path Map.xml

5 6

7 8

Click Save in the Save As window. After the file is saved a window appears The operation completed successfully. Click OK in this window.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 285

9216 COMPACT IBS TARGET POWER OFFSET


TX1/TX2 Targ Pwr Offset Fields This Appendix describes the applications where the TX1 Targ Pwr Offset and TX2 Targ Pwr Offset BTS Primary RF Path Map fields are non-zero. In almost all applications these fields should be 0. However there are a few In-Building Low Power applications of the Compact 4.0 where these fields must be non-zero. CAUTION: These fields are set in the factory and should not be changed unless it is certain that they must be changed due to reconfiguration, etc.

9216 Compact Configuration Overview

The many different configurations of the 9216 Compact can be grouped into three categories: Standard Configuration, In-Building System (IBS), and Hot Spot. IBS configurations are typically used for in-building low power per carrier applications. IBS configurations do not have receive diversity. IBS cells only use one RF output port. IBS cells use Max Power and CBR Attenuation values that do not reflect the actual output power at the antenna connector. For example, cells not equipped with amplifiers are IBS cells. Inbuilding cells typically have splitters and combiners. Just because a cell is located indoors that does not make it an IBS configuration. Cells that are configured for a Hot Spot application are typically multi carrier low output power per carrier cells. Hot Spot cells do have receive diversity. Hot Spot configurations have an RF output power of 5W per carrier for 850 cells. For Hot Spot cells the TX1 Targ Pwr Offset and TX2 Targ Pwr Offset BTS Primary RF Path Map fields are 0.0. Any Compact that is not configured for IBS or Hot Spot applications is considered a Standard Configuration. All Standard Configuration 9216 Compact cells must have the TX1 Targ Pwr Offset and TX2 Targ Pwr Offset BTS Primary RF Path Map fields set to 0.0.

TX1/TX2 Targ Pwr Offset

See the table below for possible values of the TX1 and TX2 Targ Pwr Offset.

Output Power per Carrier / Bandclass 5 Watts / Cellular 2.5 dBm / Cellular This configuration has no amplifiers and does not have a combiner or a splitter and is for 1-3 carrier cells -1 dBm / Cellular This configuration has no amplifiers and is equipped with a 2:1 combiner and a 1:2 splitter and is for 4-6 carrier cells -3dBm / Cellular This configuration has no amplifiers and is equipped with a 3:1 combiner and a 1:3 splitter and is for 7 carrier cells

TX1 Targ Pwr Offset & TX2 Targ Pwr Offset Values 6.02 40.51

44.01

46.01

NOTE: These are IBS configurations: single sector cells with 1 RF Output (i.e. only 1 antenna is connected to the cell)

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 286

9216 COMPACT IBS TARGET POWER OFFSET, Continued


TX1/TX2 Targ Pwr Offset (continued)
Output Power per Carrier / Bandclass TX1 Targ Pwr Offset & TX2 Targ Pwr Offset Values 6.02 39.54

4 Watts / PCS 2.5 dBm / PCS This configuration has no amplifiers and does not have a combiner or a splitter and is for 1-3 carrier cells -1.5 dBm / PCS This configuration has no amplifiers and is equipped with a 2:1 combiner and 1:2 splitter and is for 4-6 carrier cells -3.5 dBm / PCS This configuration has no amplifiers and is equipped with a 3:1 combiner and 1:3 splitter and is for 7 carrier cells

43.54

45.54

NOTE: These are IBS Configurations: single sector cells with 1 RF Output (i.e. only 1 antenna is connected to the cell)

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 287

9228 BASE STATION MACRO LP TARGET POWER OFFSET


TX1/TX2 Targ Pwr Offset Fields This Appendix describes the applications where the TX1 Targ Pwr Offset and TX2 Targ Pwr Offset BTS Primary RF Path Map fields are non-zero. In almost all applications these fields should be 0. However the 9228 Base Station Macro LP requires these fields to be non-zero. CAUTION: These fields are set in the factory and should not be changed unless it is certain that they must be changed due to reconfiguration, etc.

TX1/TX2 Targ Pwr Offset

See the table below for possible values of the TX1 and TX2 Targ Pwr Offset.

NOTE: The 10 dB Attenuator, if equipped, is located on the amplifiers RF IN port. 9228 Macro LP Configuration No Amplifiers Band Class 850 PCS Filters Equipped, Amplifiers Equipped (With 10 dB Attenuator) Filters Equipped, Amplifiers Equipped (Without 10 dB Attenuator) 2-Watt Composite with Filters Equipped, Amplifiers Equipped (With 12 dB Attenuator) 0-Watt Composite with no Filters and Amplifiers Equipped AWS 0-Watt Composite with Filters Equipped and no Amplifiers Equipped NOTE: The 10 dB or 12 dB Attenuator, if equipped, is located on the amplifiers RF IN port. 43.80 850 PCS 850 PCS TX1/TX2 Target Power Offset 43.01 42.04 10.0 9.0 0.0 0.0

AWS

12.0

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 288

9222 MICRO (WITHOUT AMP) TARGET POWER OFFSET


TX1 Targ Pwr Offset Fields This Appendix describes the applications where the TX1 Targ Pwr Offset BTS Primary RF Path Map fields are non-zero. In almost all applications these fields should be 0. However the 9222 Micro (without Amp) requires these fields to be non-zero. CAUTION: These fields are set in the factory and should not be changed unless it is certain that they must be changed due to reconfiguration, etc.

TX1 Targ Pwr Offset

See the table below for possible values of the TX1 Targ Pwr Offset.

9222 Micro (without Amp) Configuration No Amplifiers

Band Class 850 PCS

TX1 Target Power Offset 43.01 42.04

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 289

CHANGING PORT MAP VERSIONS


Changing Version Numbers Follow the procedures below to change the UCR RF Port Map version for all equipped URCs. NOTE: The CSU/ATM Parameters, BTS RF Test Path Map, and BTS Primary RF Path Map all have the Advanced button at the bottom of the screen. The advanced button is used to view the Advanced Serial Memory Parameters screen. Follow the procedures below to change the UCR RF Port Map version. Step 1 2 Action In the BTS Primary RF Path Map, select Advanced at the bottom of the screen. NOTE: Refer to Figure 86 on page 194. Change the Record Version to 1.

3 4

Click Apply in Advanced Serial Memory Record Parameters screen Click Yes in the Are you sure?? window.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 290

CHANGING PORT MAP VERSIONS, Continued


Changing Version Numbers (continued)
Step 5 6 Action Click Cancel Advanced Serial Memory Record Parameters screen Click Apply from the BTS Primary RF Path Map Window. IF ... More that 1 URC is present in the frame. Only 1 URC is present in the frame 7 THEN ... Proceed to Step 7. Proceed to Step 8.

Click Confirm in the Synchronized EEPROM Write window.

NOTE: RMT checks for the existence of other equipped URCs and prompt the user to update the backplane. Verify that all equipped URCs are shown and checked ().

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 291

FINAL PROCEDURES
Test Cleanup/ Final Procedures Follow the procedure below for test cleanup procedures.

Step 1 2 3 4 5 6

Action Click DISCONNECT on the RMT screen. Click File Exit. Remove all test equipment connections from the equipment. For example, remove the crossover cable. Reconnect the T1/E1, if necessary. Reseat all equipped URCs. Secure the cabinet door.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 292

BTS RF TEST PATH MAP BACKPLANE PARAMETERS


RMT 31.0 Job Aid Section JA500 GENERAL INFORMATION
Purpose This section describes procedures for verifying and setting BTS RF Test Path Map backplane parameters. The BTS RF Test Path Maps are verified and set using RMT and are accessed via the RMT pull-down menu (as shown below):

In conjunction with the on-line RMT HELP menu, the following procedures will aid the user in verifying and setting these backplane parameters.

The following procedures are provided in this section: Section/Description

Section JA510 - Verifying and Setting BTS Primary RF Path Map on page 295

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 293

This page intentionally left blank.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 294

BTS RF Test Path Map Backplane Parameters


Section JA510 - Verifying and Setting BTS Primary RF Path Map GENERAL
Section Description This section describes procedures for verifying and setting the BTS RF Test Path Map backplane parameters for the following platforms: 9218/9228 Base Station Macro 9216/9226 Base Station Compact 9223 Ultra Compact 9224 Base Station Sub-Compact 9224 Base Station Sub-Compact EN 9228 Base Station Macro IN 9228 Base Station Macro LP 9218/9228 Macro HD 9228 Macro MCPA-D 9228 Macro MCPA-HD 9228 Macro MCPA-M4

The BTS RF Test Path Map is verified and set using the Remote Maintenance Tool (RMT). It is assumed that the cell equipment has already been integrated and is in-service, meaning the RF Test Path Map was properly configured at the time of integration. The procedures specified herein are to be performed if problems occur during the operation of the cell equipment or when updates need to be made to the existing RF Test Path Map. The BTS RF Test Path Map parameters can be reviewed either on-line or off-line via the RMT connection. It is highly recommended that whenever changes or updates are made to the backplane parameters that the cell is removed from service.

Note: When creating or modifying .xml files always save a copy of the file to the appropriate directory folder on your computer.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 295

FACILITIES DISCONNECTION
Facilities Disconnection The connection between the switch and the cell must be removed prior to performing RMT standalone testing. Step 1 Action Refer to the FACILITIES DISCONNECTION procedures on page 52 to remove the cell from service.

RMT INITIALIZATION
Connect with RMT Use the following procedure to connect to the cells CDMA voice controller (URC) with RMT. Refer to the RMT Initialization and Startup procedures on page 17. Step 1 2 Action Connect to the cell controller (URC) with RMT. The updates described in this section can be performed while connected to the cell with RMT and using the Boot Generic. It is not necessary to boot to a callprocessing generic to perform the procedures defined in this section.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 296

Proceed as directed by the table below: IF the cell is a 9218/9228 Macro HD or 9218/9228 Macro HD - Dual Band . Base Station 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-D or, Base Station 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-HD or, Base Station 9228 Base Station Macro MCPAM4. 9218 Macro, 9216 Compact, 9223 Ultra Compact, 9224 Sub-Compact (with UCRs), 9216 Compact Distributed 850 MHz.. 9228 Macro, 9228 Macro IN, 9228 Macro LP, 9226 Compact, 9226 Compact 450 MHz, or 9216 Compact Distributed 450, 9224 Sub-Compact EN, 9224 Sub-Compact (with MCRs), 9222 Micro.. THEN Go to 9218/9228 MACRO HD RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION on the next page. Go to 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION on page 318.

Go to 9218 MACRO (FORMALLY MODCELL 4.0) BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION on page 333.

Go to 9228 MACRO BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION on page 355.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 297

9218/9228 MACRO HD RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION


Section Description This section describes the procedures to verify and update the 9218/9228 Macro HD RF Test Path Map on the following products: 9218 or 9228 Macro High Density (HD) connected to: o S2 LAF frame o Pre-R29 BS 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A frame (MCPA) (without filters) Pre-R29 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A (without filters) configurations are defined as configurations where the S2 LAF frame has been replaced with an 9228 Base Station Macro MCPAA frame but the digital shelf has not been reconfigured to support the R29 interface between the digital shelf and the 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A frame. o Pre-R29 BS 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A frame (MCPA) (with filters) Pre-R29 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A (with filters) configurations are defined as configurations where the S2 LAF and AIF frames have been replaced with an 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A frame with filters but the digital shelf has not been reconfigured to support the R29 interface between the digital shelf and the 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A frame. Pre-R29 Cell Generic Note: Pre-R29 configurations can operate on R29 and later cell generics but are not considered R29 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA configurations until the lineup has been reconfigured to support the R29 interface between the digital shelf and the 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A frame. Updating the BTS RF Test Path Map requires the use of the Remote Maintenance Tool (RMT). The procedures specified herein are to be performed if: Do Not Use This Section for R29 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA Configurations Updates are needed to the existing backplane parameters (i.e. during carrier growth, or pre R29 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A installation, or radio growth scenarios); Problems occur during the integration process of the cell equipment.

This section cannot be used to update the BTS Primary RF Path Map on R29 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA configurations. Go to 9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION on page 218 to program the BTS Primary RF Path Map for these configurations: R29 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA Configurations are defined as lineups that support the R29 interface between the digital shelf and the 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A frame. R29 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA Configurations include the following lineups: o 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-D o 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-HD o 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-M4 BTS RF Test Path Maps are set in the factory based on the cabinet configuration and equipage. If problems are experienced during the integration efforts related to the BTS RF Test Path Map and/or when field changes are made to the cabinet, use the following procedures to update the path map information. This section gives instructions for populating each field of the BTS RF Test Path Map.

When to Update the BTS RF Test Path Map

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 298

9218/9228 MACRO HD RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued


Configuration Aid Document (CA 100) The procedures outlined in this section are supported with the .xml files packaged in the Configuration Aid (CA 100) document. The CA 100 document is available through the AlcatelLucent Customer Information Center (CIC) see CONFIGURATION AID (CA100) INSTALLATION on page 14 for information on accessing and loading this document. The CA 100 document includes: The various cell configurations, Applicable RF power calibration sections, and Packaged XML files. Test Equipment Information TDU Numbering The following provides test equipment information that pertains to the HD 4.0/4.0B configurations. Currently a frame with UCRs (5 MHz Radio) can be equipped with the TDU 1 and TDU 2. TDU 1 is used for antenna tests while TDU 2 is used for Closed Loop Gain Control (CLGC). RMT does not reference TDU in the same manner as ECP Database translations. See the table below. This Handbook section follows the RMT convention and refers to the TDU in a frame as TDU 1 or TDU 2. Frame Primary RMT Reference 1 2 Growth #1 Database Translation Reference 1 2 Function Antenna Test CLGC

Not Applicable. TDU is not support in an HD Growth 1 frame.

TDU Connections

TDU 1 connects to the J2 & J3 ports for Duplex and Triplex filters. TDU 2 connects to the external coupler on the J8 or J9 port of the Duplex and Triplex filters.

MCR Connections

For the HD RF paths, the MCR connects to a Dual Duplex Filter (MCRs transmitting through a Modcell 3.0 Filter is not supported). The MCR supports both Antenna Test and Closed Loop Gain Control (CLGC). The following ports on the MCR are used for these functions: MCR Port RC1 RC2 TONE Dual Duplex Filter Connection J11 J31 J41 Function CLGC (for Tx1 port) CLGC (for Tx2 port) Antenna Test

NOTE: The MCR can also connect to the HD Combiner Attenuator Unit (CAU). In this case, the MCR is transmitting through the SII LAC or pre-R29 BS 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A (MCPA). CLGC is not supported for MCRs connected to a CAU and Antenna Tests are executed by the SII RTU (if equipped).

Continued on next page Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 299

9218/9228 MACRO HD RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued


General Information Save the original RF Test Path Map .xml files because they may be needed for backout purposes. Follow this procedure to save the following files: Original TDU RF Test Path Map and Original Radio RF Test Path Map.

Save Original TDU RF Test Path Map

Follow the procedure below to save the original TDU RF Test Path Map data on the BTS RF Test Path Map window.

Step 1

Action Click Config RF Calibration BTS RF Test Path Map from the main RMT window. The BTS RF Test Path Map window will appear as shown below: TDU RF Test Path Maps Tab URC to Update Box

Figure 103: TDU RF Test Path Map Tab


2 Verify that the TDU RF Test Path Map tab is selected as shown in Figure 103 above.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 300

9218/9228 MACRO HD RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued


Save Original TDU RF Test Path Map (continued)
Step 3 Select the appropriate URC ID. IF saving ... URC 1 URC 2 URC 3 4 5 Click Save in the Configuration File Box. Type the filename as shown below and save it to a directory as desired. Cell X Original TDU RF Test Where: X = Cell Number NOTES: Refer to SAVE CONFIGURATION FILE on page 379 for procedures to create a directory to store files. When saving an xml file from the TDU RF Test Path Map tab, all TDU configuration data is saved (TDUs 1-4). THEN set Select the URC you want to update to 1 2 3 Action

6 7

Click Save in the Save As Box. Proceed to the procedure Save Original Radio RF Test Path Map on the next page.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 301

9218/9228 MACRO HD RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued


Save Original Radio RF Test Path Map Follow the procedure below to save the original Radio RF Test Path Map data on the BTS RF Test Path Map window.

Step 1

Action From the BTS RF Test Path Map window, click on the Radio RF Test Path Map tab. See below. URC to Update Radio RF Test Path Map Tab

Figure 104: Radio RF Test Path Map Tab


2 Select the appropriate URC ID. IF saving ... URC 1 URC 2 URC 3 THEN set Select the URC you want to update to 1 2 3

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 302

9218/9228 MACRO HD RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued


Save Original Radio RF Test Path Map (continued)
Step 3 4 Action Click Save in the Configuration File Box. Type the filename as shown below and save it to a directory as desired. Cell X Original MCR RF Test Where X = Cell Number NOTES: Refer to SAVE CONFIGURATION FILE on page 379 for procedures to create a directory to store files. When saving an xml file from the Radio RF Test Path Map tab, all MCR configuration data is saved (MCR 1 through MCR 6) Proceed to 9218/9228 HD TDU RF TEST PATH MAP TAB on the next page.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 303

9218/9228 HD TDU RF TEST PATH MAP TAB


Configure TDU1 Port Map Follow this procedure to configure and update TDU1 RF Port Map.

Step 1

Action Verify that the TDU RF Test Path Map tab is selected as shown in Figure 105 below. TDU Number TDU RF Test Path Map Tab

Figure 105: TDU 1 BTS RF Test Path Window


2 3 Set TDU Number to 1. Set the Equipped field (located below tab) as shown below: IF TDU 1 is Equipped a) b) Not Equipped a) b) THEN Place a check mark ( ) in the Equipped field (top left of window) Proceed to Step 4 on the next page. Uncheck the Equipped field Proceed to the procedure Configure TDU2 Port Map on page 309.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 304

9218/9228 HD TDU RF TEST PATH MAP TAB, Continued


Configure TDU1 Port Map (continued)
Step 4 5 6 7 8 9 Action Set External RFS Cable Input to None. In the Test Unit Location box, set the Digital Shelf to 1. In the Test Unit Location box, set the Filter Shelf to 1. In the Test Unit Location box, set Slot Number to 1. Beginning with TDU 1 Port Number 1, trace the cable to the connection on the filter. Follow the table below to determine Sector setting: IF TDU1 Port is connected to AND Equipped in filter slot 1 or 2 Modcell 3.0 Filter 3 or 4 5 or 6 1 Dual Duplex Filter 2 3 No Filter N/A THEN set Sector to Alpha Beta Gamma Alpha,Alpha Beta,Beta Gamma,Gamma _NC_

NOTE: Refer to Figure 106, on the next page, for an example of filter slot numbering. 10 Follow the table below to determine Antenna setting: IF TDU1 Port is connected to Modcell 3.0 Filter Dual Duplex Filter No Filter AND the Diversity number is Diversity 0 Diversity 1 N/A N/A THEN set Antenna to ... 1 2 1,2 _NC_

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 305

9218/9228 HD TDU RF TEST PATH MAP TAB, Continued


Configure TDU1 Port Map (continued)

Alpha Div 0

Alpha Div 1

Beta Div 0

Beta Div 1

Gamma Div 0

Gamma Div 1

Duplex or Triplex Modcell 3.0 Filter Panels

Filter 1 J8 J9

Filter 2 J8 J9

Filter 3 J8 J9

Filter 4 J8 J9

Filter 5 J8 J9

Filter 6 J8 J9

Slot 1

Slot 2

Slot 3

Slot 4

Slot 5

Slot 6

Alpha

Beta

Gamma

Dual Duplex Filter Panels (3 Sector)

Filter 1 Div 0 J8

Filter 2 Div 1 J28

Filter 3 Div 0 J8

Filter 4 Div 1 J28

Filter 5 Div 0 J8

Filter 6 Div 1 J28

Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 NOTE: Trace the cables from the TDU or MCR Port to the Filter. Filters are numbered 1 through 6 (from left to right) regardless if they are in a primary or growth frame. Also note that each Dual-Duplex filter has two Filter Panels associated with it.

Figure 106: Filter Numbering Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 306

9218/9228 HD TDU RF TEST PATH MAP TAB, Continued


Configure TDU1 Port Map (continued)

Step 11

Action Follow the table below to determine Filter Type setting: IF TDU1 Port is connected to ... Modcell 3.0 Filter Dual Duplex Filter No Filter THEN set Filter Type to ... Modcell3.0 DualDuplexer NoFilterPanel

12

Follow the table below to determine Coupler Type setting: IF TDU1 Port is connected to ... J3 Connector of a Modcell 3.0 Filter J2 Connector of a Modcell 3.0 Filter J41 Connector of a Dual Duplex Filter No Filter THEN set Coupler Type to ... Incident Reflected SwitchedBDT NoCoupler

13

Follow the table below to determine Filter Number setting: IF TDU1 Port is connected to ... AND the filter is in physical slot location 1 2 Modcell 3.0 Filter 3 4 5 6 1 Dual Duplex Filter 2 3 No Filter N/A THEN set Filter Number to 1 2 3 4 5 6 1,2 3,4 5,6 _NoFP_

NOTE: Refer to Figure 106, on page 306, for an example of filter slot numbering.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 307

9218/9228 HD TDU RF TEST PATH MAP TAB, Continued


Configure TDU1 Port Map (continued)
Step 14 Action Follow the table below to determine FP RF Path Num setting: IF TDU 1 Port is connected to AND the following transmit ports are being used on the filter J8 only Triplex Modcell 3.0 Filter J8 and J9 J9 only 15 16 Duplex Modcell 3.0 Filter, Dual Duplex Filter, or No Filter Panel N/A THEN set FP RF Path Num to ... 1 1 2 1

Repeat Steps 9 -14 for each remaining Port Numbers. Proceed to the procedure Configure TDU2 Port Map on the next page.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 308

9218/9228 HD TDU RF TEST PATH MAP TAB, Continued


Configure TDU2 Port Map Follow the procedure to update the TDU2 port map information.

Step 1

Action Set TDU Number to 2 as shown in Figure 107 below. TDU Number

Figure 107: TDU 2 BTS RF Test Path Window


2 Set the Equipped field (located below tab) as shown below: IF TDU 1 is ... Equipped (See Note) a) THEN ... Place a check mark ( ) in the Equipped field (top left of window) Proceed to Step 3 on the next page. Uncheck the Equipped field Proceed to 9218/9228 HD RADIO RF TEST PATH MAP TAB on page 313.

b) Not Equipped a) b)

NOTE: TDU 2 Equipped means: The frame must contain UCRs and the radios must be using a TDU to perform Closed Loop Gain Control (CLGC). Verify that the TDU is connected to the same OneBTS filters used by the UCRs.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 309

9218/9228 HD TDU RF TEST PATH MAP TAB, Continued


Configure TDU2 Port Map (continued)
Step 3 4 5 6 7 Action Set External RFS Cable Input to None. In the Test Unit Location box set the Digital Shelf to 1. In the Test Unit Location box set Slot Number to 2. Beginning with TDU 2 Port Number 1, trace the cable to the connection on the filter. Follow the table below to determine Sector setting: IF TDU2 Port is connected to AND equipped in filter slot 1 or 2 Modcell 3.0 Filter 3 or 4 5 or 6 1 Dual Duplex Filter 2 3 No Filter N/A THEN set Sector to ... Alpha Beta Gamma Alpha,Alpha Beta,Beta Gamma,Gamma _NC_

NOTE: Refer to Figure 106, on page 306, for an example of filter slot numbering. 8 Follow the table below to determine Antenna setting: IF TDU2 Port is connected to Modcell 3.0 Filter AND using Diversity 0 Diversity 1 Port J11 Dual Duplex Filter Port J31 No Filter 9 N/A 2 _NC_ THEN set Antenna to ... 1 2 1

Follow the table below to determine Filter Type setting: IF TDU2 Port is connected to ... Modcell 3.0 Filter Dual Duplex Filter No Filter THEN set Filter Type to ... Modcell3.0 DualDuplexer NoFilterPanel

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 310

9218/9228 HD TDU RF TEST PATH MAP TAB, Continued


Configure TDU2 Port Map (continued)
Step 10 Action Follow the table below to determine Coupler Type setting: IF TDU2 Port is connected to ... Modcell 3.0 Filter, or Dual Duplex Filter No Filter 11 THEN ... DPD NoCoupler

Follow the table below to determine Filter Number setting: IF TDU2 Port is connected to ... Filter 1 Filter 2 Filter 3 Filter 4 Filter 5 Filter 6 No Filter THEN set Filter Number to 1 2 3 4 5 6 _NoFP_

NOTE: This setting refers to the actual Filter number and NOT the physical slot number. Refer to Figure 106, on page 306, for more information on how filters are numbered. 12 Follow the table below to determine FP RF Path Num setting: IF TDU 2 Port is connected to a coupler on the J9 port of a Triplex filter 13 14 a coupler on the J8 port of a Duplex or Triplex filter, or any port on a Dual Duplex filter THEN set FP RF Path Num to 2 1

Repeat Steps 8-14 for each Port Number. Proceed to the procedure Set Radio Tab to Default on the next page.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 311

9218/9228 HD TDU RF TEST PATH MAP TAB, Continued


Set Radio Tab to Default Follow the procedure below to set the Radio RF Test Path Map to their default values. NOTE: The HD frame will support TDUs, or MCRs, but not both. If the TDU Path Map is used, then set the MCR Tab to default values. Step 1 Action From the BTS RF Test Path Map window, click on the Radio RF Test Path Map tab. See below. Radio RF Test Path Map Tab Radio Number

Figure 108: Radio RF Test Path Map Tab


2 3 Click Recall button in the Configuration File box. Navigate to the directory below and select the file in bold: C:\Program Files\Lucent Technologies\RMT\config\1bts\IEH\RF TEST PM MCR RF TEST Unequipped.xml Click Open. NOTE: If the proper file was selected the Equipped field (located below tab) should be unchecked for all Radios (1-6). See Figure 108 above. Proceed to the procedure FINAL PROCEDURES on page 377.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 312

9218/9228 HD RADIO RF TEST PATH MAP TAB


Configure the Radio RF Test Path Map Tab Follow the procedure to update the MCR port map information. The MCR has 3 ports: Port 1 = RC1 (Receive CLGC 1) Port 2 = RC2 (Receive CLGC 2) Port 3 = TONE (Antenna Tests) NOTE: This procedure should only be used if MCRs are equipped in the frame and used to perform test diagnostics. Step 1 Action From the BTS RF Test Path Map window, click on the Radio RF Test Path Map tab. See below. Radio RF Test Path Map Tab Radio Number

Equipped Field

Figure 109: Radio RF Test Path Map Tab


2 Select the Radio Number (start with Radio 1).

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 313

9218/9228 HD RADIO RF TEST PATH MAP TAB, Continued


Configure the Radio RF Test Path Map Tab (continued)

Step 3

Action Set the Equipped field (located below tab) as shown below: IF the MCR is ... Equipped AND connected to OneBTS Amplifiers a) THEN ... Place a check mark ( ) in the Equipped field (top left of window) Proceed to Step 4. Uncheck the Equipped field Proceed to Step 4. Uncheck the Equipped field Proceed to Step 4.

b) CAU (SII LAC) Not Equipped N/A a) b) a) b)

In the Test Unit Location box set the Digital Shelf field as shown below: IF the MCRs are connected to filters in the ... Primary Cabinet Growth #1 Cabinet THEN set Digital Shelf to ... 1 2

5 6

In the Test Unit Location box, set the Filter Shelf to 1. Proceed to Radio Tab Port 1 and Port 2 on next page.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 314

9218/9228 HD RADIO RF TEST PATH MAP TAB, Continued


Radio Tab Port 1 and Port 2 Follow the procedure to update the following MCR Ports: Port 1 = RC1 (Receive CLGC 1) Port 2 = RC2 (Receive CLGC 2) Start with Port 1 and then repeat the steps for Port 2. Step 1 2 Action Trace the RC1 cable to the connection on the filter. Follow the table below to determine Sector setting: IF MCR Port is connected to a AND Equipped in filter slot 1 Dual Duplex Filter 2 3 No Filter N/A THEN set Sector to ... Alpha Beta Gamma _NC_

NOTE: Refer to Figure 106, on page 306, for an example of filter slot numbering. 3 Follow the table below to determine Antenna setting: IF MCR Port is connected to Dual Duplex Filter in the Primary Frame Dual Duplex Filter in the Growth-1 Frame No Filter 4 AND the Diversity number is Diversity 0 Diversity 1 Diversity 0 Diversity 1 N/A THEN set Antenna to ... 1 2 3 4 _NC_

Follow the table below to determine Filter Type setting: IF MCR Port is connected to ... Dual Duplex Filter No Filter THEN set Filter Type to ... DualDuplexer NoFilterPanel

Follow the table below to determine Coupler Type setting: IF MCR Port is connected to ... Dual Duplex Filter No Filter THEN set Coupler Type to ... DPD NoCoupler

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 315

9218/9228 HD RADIO RF TEST PATH MAP TAB, Continued


Radio Tab Port 1 and Port 2 (continued)
Step 6 Action Follow the table below to determine Filter Number setting: IF MCR Port is connected to Dual Duplex Filter No Filter THEN set Filter Number to ... 16 _NC_

NOTE: Use the filter number where the Radios RC1/RC2 Port is connected. Refer to Figure 106, on page 306, for an example of filter slot numbering. 7 8 9 Set the FP RF Path Num to 1. Trace the RC2 cable to the connection on the filter and then repeat Steps 2 7. Proceed to MCR Tab Port 3 below.

MCR Tab Port 3

Follow the procedure to update the following: Port 3 = TONE (Antenna Test) Step 1 2 Action Trace the RC3 cables to the connection on the filter. Follow the table below to determine Sector setting: IF MCR Port is connected to a AND Equipped in filter slot 1 Dual Duplex Filter 2 3 No Filter N/A THEN set Sector to ... Alpha,Alpha Beta,Beta Gamma,Gamma _NC_

NOTE: Refer to Figure 106, on page 306, for an example of filter slot numbering. 3 Follow the table below to determine Antenna setting: IF MCR Port is connected to Dual Duplex Filter in the Primary Frame Dual Duplex Filter in the Growth-1 Frame No Filter THEN set Antenna to ... 1,2 3,4 _NC_

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 316

9218/9228 HD RADIO RF TEST PATH MAP TAB, Continued


MCR Tab Port 3 (continued)
Step 4 Action Follow the table below to determine Filter Type setting: IF MCR Port is connected to ... Dual Duplex Filter No Filter 5 THEN set Filter Type to ... DualDuplexer NoFilterPanel

Follow the table below to determine Coupler Type setting: IF MCR Port is connected to ... Dual Duplex Filter No Filter THEN set Coupler Type to ... SwitchedBDT NoCoupler

Follow the table below to determine Filter Number setting: IF MCR Port is connected to AND the filter is in slot 1 Dual Duplex Filter 2 3 No Filter N/A THEN set Filter Number to ... 1,2 3,4 5,6 _NC_

NOTE: Refer to Figure 106, on page 306, for an example of filter slot numbering. 7 8 9 Set the FP RF Path Num to 1. Repeat 9218/9228 HD RADIO RF TEST PATH MAP TAB on page 313 (starting with Step 2) for each equipped MCR. Proceed to the FINAL PROCEDURES on page 377.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 317

9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION
Section Description This section describes the procedures to verify and edit the BTS RF Test Path Map on the following products: R29 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA Configurations are defined as lineups that support the R29 interface between the digital shelf and the 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A frame. R29 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA Configurations include the following lineups: o 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-D o 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-HD o 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-M4

Update the BTS RF Test Path Map requires the use of the Remote Maintenance Tool (RMT). The procedures specified herein are to be performed if: When to Update the BTS RF Test Path Map Updates are needed to the existing backplane parameters (i.e. HD conversion, during carrier growth, or 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA installation, or radio growth scenarios); Problems occur during the integration process of the cell equipment.

BTS RF Test Path Maps are set in the factory based on the cabinet configuration and equipage. If problems are experienced during the integration efforts related to the BTS RF Test Path Map and/or when field changes are made to the cabinet, use the following procedures to update the path map information. This section gives instructions for populating each field of the BTS RF Test Path Map.

Configuration Aid Document (CA 100)

The procedures outlined in this section are supported with the .xml files packaged in the Configuration Aid (CA 100) document. The CA 100 document is available through the AlcatelLucent Customer Information Center (CIC) see CONFIGURATION AID (CA100) INSTALLATION on page 14 for information on accessing and loading this document. The CA 100 document includes: The various cell configurations, Configuration overview, Schematics, Backplane programming information, Applicable RF power calibration sections, and Packaged XML files.

Test Equipment Information

The following provides test equipment information that pertains to the 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA configurations.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 318

9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
MCR Connections The MCR connects to a 9228 Macro MCPA-A filter assembly. The 9228 Macro MCPA-A supports both Duplex and Simplex filter configurations. The MCR supports both Antenna Test and Pilot Power Measurements (PPM). The following ports on the MCR are used for these functions: MCR Test Port RC1 RC2 TONE 9228 Macro MCPA-A Filter Connection J41 N/A J41 Function Pilot Power Measurements N/A Antenna Test

The MCRs will typically be in positions 1, 2 and 3. MCRs may also be in positions 4, 5, and 6 but only three MCRs are cabled and utilized for Antenna Tests and the Pilot Power Measurements. NOTE: 9228 Macro MCPA configurations do not support closed-loop gain control (CLGC).

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 319

9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
General Information Save the original RF Test Path Map .xml files because they may be needed for backout purposes. Follow this procedure to save the following files: Original TDU RF Test Path Map and Original Radio RF Test Path Map.

Save Original TDU RF Test Path Map

Follow the procedure below to save the original TDU RF Test Path Map data on the BTS RF Test Path Map window.

Step 1

Action Make an OFF-LINE connection to the cell with RMT.

WARNING: With Release 31 or later, the Amplifiers in the MCPA-A frame will automatically receive firmware updates upon boot. If an amplifier is receiving a firmware update, the status LED on the amplifier will be blinking orange and yellow during the download. To prevent damage to the amplifier, DO NOT interrupt the download process. The download takes approximately 4 minutes for each amplifier. NOTE: An ON-LINE connection may be used, however, any backplane changes will not take affect until the cell is booted. On-line connections are generally used to monitor cell status and to perform on-line RF power calibrations. 2 Click Config RF Calibration BTS RF Test Path Map from the main RMT window. The BTS RF Test Path Map window will appear as shown below: TDU RF Test Path Maps Tab URC to Update Box

Figure 110: TDU RF Test Path Map Tab Continued on next page Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 320

9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Save Original TDU RF Test Path Map (continued)
Step 3 Select the appropriate URC ID. IF saving ... URC 1 URC 2 URC 3 4 5 Click Save in the Configuration File Box. Type the filename as shown below and save it to a directory as desired. Cell X Original TDU RF Test Where: X = Cell Number NOTES: Refer to SAVE CONFIGURATION FILE on page 379 for procedures to create a directory to store files. When saving an xml file from the TDU RF Test Path Map tab, all TDU configuration data is saved (TDUs 1-4). THEN set Select the URC you want to update to 1 2 3 Action

6 7

Click Save in the Save As Box. Proceed to the procedure Save Original Radio RF Test Path Map on the next page.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 321

9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Save Original Radio RF Test Path Map Follow the procedure below to save the original Radio RF Test Path Map data on the BTS RF Test Path Map window.

Step 1

Action From the BTS RF Test Path Map window, click on the Radio RF Test Path Map tab. See below. URC to Update Radio RF Test Path Map Tab

Figure 111: Radio RF Test Path Map Tab


2 Select the appropriate URC ID. IF saving ... URC 1 URC 2 URC 3 THEN set Select the URC you want to update to 1 2 3

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 322

9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Save Original Radio RF Test Path Map (continued)
Step 3 4 Action Click Save in the Configuration File Box. Type the filename as shown below and save it to a directory as desired. Cell X Original MCR RF Test Where X = Cell Number NOTES: Refer to SAVE CONFIGURATION FILE on page 379 for procedures to create a directory to store files. When saving an xml file from the Radio RF Test Path Map tab, all MCR configuration data is saved (MCR 1 through MCR 6) Proceed to Configure TDU RF Test Path Maps Tab on the next page.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 323

9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Configure TDU RF Test Path Maps Tab Follow the steps bellow to configure the RF Test Path Maps

Step 1 2 3

Action Click on the TDU RF Test Path Maps tab. Click Recall button in the Configuration File box. Navigate to the directory below and select the file in bold: C:\Program Files\Lucent Technologies\RMT\config\1bts\IEH\RF TEST PM TDU RF TEST Unequipped.xml Click Open. NOTE: If the proper file was selected the Equipped field (located below tab) should be unchecked for all TDUs (1-4). See Figure 112 below: Equipped Field (unchecked for TDU 1 4)

Figure 112: Unequipped TDU RF Test Path Map


5 Continue to Configure the Radio RF Test Path Maps Tab on the next page.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 324

9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Configure the Radio RF Test Path Maps Tab Follow the procedure to update the Radio RF Test Path Map information. The MCR has 3 ports: Port 1 = RC1 (Pilot Power Measurements) Port 2 = RC2 (N/A) Port 3 = TONE (Antenna Tests) NOTE: This procedure applies only to MCRs, if there are 850 UCRs in the frame there will not be a Radio RF Test Path Map for these radios. Step 1 Action From the BTS RF Test Path Map window, click on the Radio RF Test Path Maps tab. See below. Radio RF Test Path Maps Tab Radio Number

Equipped Field

Figure 113: Radio RF Test Path Maps Tab


2 Select the Radio Number (start with Radio 1).

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 325

9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Configure the Radio RF Test Path Maps Tab (continued)

Step 3

Action Set the Equipped field (located below tab) as shown below: IF an MCR is... Equipped c) d) Not Equipped c) d) THEN ... Place a check mark ( ) in the Equipped field (top left of window) Proceed to Step 4. Uncheck the Equipped field Proceed to Step 4.

In the Test Unit Location box set the Digital Shelf field as shown below: IF the Digital Shelf is... 850 frame Single Band PCS in a Primary 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-D Dual Band PCS in the Primary 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-D PCS in Growth 1 frame PCS in Growth 2 frame PCS in Growth 3 frame THEN set Digital Shelf to ... 1 1 2 2 3 4

5 6

In the Test Unit Location box, set the Filter Shelf to 1. Proceed to Radio Tab Port 1 and Port 2 on next page.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 326

9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Radio Tab Port 1 and Port 2 Follow the procedure to update the following MCR Ports: Port 1 = RC1 (Pilot Power Measurements) Port 2 = RC2 (N/A) Port 2 is not used because the RC2 connection is not used in these configurations. NOTE: The MCRs can be in slots 1, 2, and 3 or slots 4, 5, and 6. Only three MCRs will be cabled to the filter ports.

Step 1 2

Action Trace the MCR RC1 cable to the connection on the filter. Follow the table below to determine Sector setting: IF radio port is connected to Sub-rack / Filter 1 Sub-rack / Filter 2 Sub-rack / Filter 3 THEN set Sector to ... Alpha Beta Gamma

NOTE: Refer to Figure 114 on the next page for an example of filter locations.

Follow the table below to determine Antenna setting: IF the frame is Base Station 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA (Single Band) AND radio port is connected to 850 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA Duplex Filter PCS 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA Duplex Filter No Filter (or is not used) Dual Band Base Station 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA 850 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA Duplex Filter PCS 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA Duplex Filter THEN set Antenna to... 1 1 _NC_ 1 3

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 327

9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

NOTE: Simplex filters in this configuration are passive. The controllers on the Digital Shelf have no interface to these filters.

Gamma - Filter Shelf 3

} DX/RX Filter Panel (1 & 2)

Beta - Filter Shelf 2

} DX/RX Filter Panel (1 & 2)

Alpha - Filter Shelf 1

} DX/RX Filter Panel (1 & 2)

NOTE: The above drawing illustrates a pseudo simplex configuration, two duplex filters per sector. For duplex configurations, only one filter per sector will be equipped in the frame.

Figure 114: Filter Locations (example) Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 328

9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Radio Tab Port 1 and Port 2 (continued)
Step 4 Action Follow the table below to determine Filter Type setting: IF MCR Port is connected to ... 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A Filter No Filter (or is not used) 5 THEN set Filter Type to ... McpaFP NoFilterPanel

Follow the table below to determine Coupler Type setting: IF MCR Port is connected to ... 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A Filter No Filter (or is not used) THEN set Coupler Type to ... SBDT NoCoupler

Follow the table below to determine Filter Number setting: IF MCR Port is connected to 9228 Base Station Macro MCPA-A Filter No Filter (or is not used) THEN set Filter Number to... 1 _NoFP_

7 8 9

Set the FP RF Path Num to 1. The MCR RC2 port is not being used, so continue to Step 9. Proceed to the procedure Radio Tab Port 3 on the next page.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 329

9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Radio Tab Port 3

Follow the procedure to update the following: Port 3 = TONE (Antenna Test)

Step 1 2

Action Trace the MCR TONE cable to the connection on the filter. Follow the table below to determine Sector setting: IF radio port is connected to Sub-rack / Filter 1 Sub-rack / Filter 2 Sub-rack / Filter 3 No Filter (or is not used) THEN set Sector to ... Alpha,Alpha Beta,Beta Gamma,Gamma _NC_

NOTE: Refer to Figure 114 on page 328 for an example of filter slot numbering. 3 Follow the table below to determine Antenna setting: IF the Frame is 9228 Macro MCPA (Single-band) AND Radio Port is Connected to 850 9228 Macro MCPA Duplex filter PCS 9228 Macro MCPA Duplex filter in a Non-Dual Band configuration 9228 Macro MCPA (Dual-band) 850 9228 Macro MCPA Duplex filter PCS 9228 Macro MCPA Duplex filter in a Dual-Band configuration 9228 Macro MCPA (Single-band) 9228 Macro MCPA (Dual-band) 850 9228 Macro MCPA Simplex filter 850 9228 Macro MCPA Simplex filter configuration PCS 9228 Macro MCPA w/850 Simplex filter configuration and Duplex PCS filter Dual-Band configuration THEN Set Antenna to ... 1,2 1,2

1,2 3,4 3,4

3,4 5,6

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 330

9228 BASE STATION MACRO MCPA BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Radio Tab Port 3 (continued)
Step 5 Action Follow the table below to determine Filter Shelf setting: IF radio port is connected to sub-rack / filter 1 sub-rack / filter 2 sub-rack / filter 3 NO filter (or is not used) THEN set Filter Shelf to ... 1 2 3 1

NOTE: Refer to Figure 114 on page 328 for an example of filter slot numbering. 6 Follow the table below to determine Coupler Type setting: IF MCR Port is Connected to ... 9228 Macro MCPA-A filter NO filter (or is not used) 7 8 9 10 Set the Filter Number to 1,2. Set the FP RF Path Num to 1. Repeat the procedure Configure the Radio RF Test Path Maps Tab on page 325 (starting with Step 2) for each equipped MCR. Proceed to the FINAL PROCEDURES on page 377. THEN Set Coupler Type to ... SwitchedBDT NoCoupler

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 331

This page intentionally left blank.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 332

9218 MACRO (FORMALLY MODCELL 4.0) BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION
Section Description This section describes the procedures to verify and edit the BTS RF Test Path Map on the following products: When to Update the BTS RF Test Path Map 9218 Macro, 9216 Compact, 9223 Ultra Compact, 9224 Sub-Compact (with UCRs). Or 9216 Compact Distributed 850 MHz

BTS RF Test Path Maps are set in the factory based on the cabinet configuration and equipage. If problems are experienced during the integration efforts related to the BTS RF Test Path Map and/or when field changes are made to the cabinet, use the following procedures to update the path map information. The recommended method is to update the Path Maps by recalling XML files. This section also provides instructions, in an appendix, for populating each field of the BTS RF Test Path Map. NOTE: There is no need to update factory default RF Test Path Maps for Base Station 9223 Ultra Compact.

Configuration Aid Document (CA 100)

The procedures outlined in this section are supported with the .xml files packaged in the Configuration Aid (CA 100) document. The CA 100 document is available through the AlcatelLucent Customer Information Center (CIC) see CONFIGURATION AID (CA100) INSTALLATION on page 14 for information on accessing and loading this document. The CA 100 document includes: The various cell configurations, Configuration overview, Schematics, Backplane programming information, Applicable RF power calibration sections, and Packaged XML files.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 333

9218 MACRO (FORMALLY MODCELL 4.0) BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Test Equipment Information TDU Numbering The following provides test equipment information that pertains to the various Modcell configurations. On the BTS RF Test Path Map screen, RMT references TDUs as TDUs 1, 2, 3 and 4. Currently a frame can only be equipped with the first two TDUs (TDU 1 and TDU 2). TDU 1 is used for antenna tests while TDU 2 is used for Close Loop Gain Control (CLGC). RMT does not reference TDUs in the same manner as ECP Database translations. See the table below. This Handbook section follows the RMT convention and refers to the TDUs in a frame as TDU 1 or TDU 2. Frame Primary RMT Reference 1 2 Growth #1 1 2 Growth #2 1 2 Growth #3 Database Translation Reference 1 2 5 6 9 10 Function Antenna Test CLGC Antenna Test CLGC Antenna Test CLGC

Not Applicable. TDUs are not supported in a Growth #3 frame.

TDU Connections

TDU 1 connects to the J2 & J3 ports for Duplex and Triplex filters, or to the J41 port for Dual Duplex filters. TDU 2 connects to the external coupler on the filter for Duplex and Triplex filters, or to the J11 & J31 ports for Dual Duplex filters.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 334

9218 MACRO (FORMALLY MODCELL 4.0) BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
General Information Save the original RF Test Path Map .xml files because they may be needed for backout purposes. Follow this procedure to save the following files: Original TDU RF Test Path Map and Original Radio RF Test Path Map.

Save Original TDU RF Test Path Map

Follow the procedure below to save the original TDU RF Test Path Map data on the BTS RF Test Path Map window.

Step 1

Action Click Config RF Calibration BTS RF Test Path Map from the main RMT window. The BTS RF Test Path Map window will appear as shown below: TDU RF Test Path Maps Tab URC to Update Box

Figure 115: TDU RF Test Path Map Tab


2 Verify that the TDU RF Test Path Map tab is selected as shown in Figure 115 above.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 335

9218 MACRO (FORMALLY MODCELL 4.0) BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Save Original TDU RF Test Path Map (continued)
Step 3 Select the appropriate URC ID. IF saving ... URC 1 URC 2 URC 3 4 5 Click Save in the Configuration File Box. Type the filename as shown below and save it to a directory as desired. Cell X Original TDU RF Test Where: X = Cell Number NOTES: Refer to SAVE CONFIGURATION FILE on page 379 for procedures to create a directory to store files. When saving an xml file from the TDU RF Test Path Map tab, all TDU configuration data is saved (TDUs 1-4). THEN set Select the URC you want to update to 1 2 3 Action

6 7

Click Save in the Save As Box. Proceed to the procedure Save Original Radio RF Test Path Map on the next page.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 336

9218 MACRO (FORMALLY MODCELL 4.0) BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Save Original Radio RF Test Path Map Follow the procedure below to save the original Radio RF Test Path Map data on the BTS RF Test Path Map window.

Step 1

Action From the BTS RF Test Path Map window, click on the Radio RF Test Path Map tab. See below. URC to Update Radio RF Test Path Map Tab

Figure 116: Radio RF Test Path Map Tab


2 Select the appropriate URC ID. IF saving ... URC 1 URC 2 URC 3 THEN set Select the URC you want to update to 1 2 3

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 337

9218 MACRO (FORMALLY MODCELL 4.0) BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Save Original Radio RF Test Path Map (continued)
Step 3 4 Action Click Save in the Configuration File Box. Type the filename as shown below and save it to a directory as desired. Cell X Original MCR RF Test Where X = Cell Number NOTES: Refer to SAVE CONFIGURATION FILE on page 379 for procedures to create a directory to store files. When saving an xml file from the Radio RF Test Path Map tab, all MCR configuration data is saved (MCR 1 through MCR 6) Proceed to Configure TDU1 Port Map on the next page.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 338

9218 MACRO (FORMALLY MODCELL 4.0) BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Configure TDU1 Port Map Follow this procedure to configure and update TDU1 RF Port Map.

Step 1

Action Verify that the TDU RF Test Path Map tab is selected as shown in Figure 105 below. TDU Number TDU RF Test Path Map Tab

Figure 117: TDU 1 BTS RF Test Path Window


2 3 Set TDU Number to 1. Set the Equipped field (located below tab) as shown below: IF TDU 1 is Equipped c) d) Not Equipped c) d) THEN Place a check mark ( ) in the Equipped field (top left of window) Proceed to Step 4 on the next page. Uncheck the Equipped field Proceed to the procedure Configure TDU2 Port Map on page 345.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 339

9218 MACRO (FORMALLY MODCELL 4.0) BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Configure TDU1 Port Map (continued)
Step 4 5 6 7 8 9 Action Set External RFS Cable Input to None. In the Test Unit Location box, set the Digital Shelf to 1. In the Test Unit Location box, set the Filter Shelf to 1. In the Test Unit Location box, set Slot Number to 1. Beginning with TDU 1 Port Number 1, trace the cable to the connection on the filter. Follow the table below to determine Sector setting: IF TDU1 Port is connected to AND equipped in filter slot 1 or 2 Modcell 3.0 Filter 3 or 4 5 or 6 1 Dual Duplex Filter 2 3 No Filter N/A THEN set Sector to ... Alpha Beta Gamma Alpha, Alpha Beta, Beta Gamma, Gamma _NC_

NOTE: Refer to Figure 118 on the next page for example of filter slot numbering.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 340

9218 MACRO (FORMALLY MODCELL 4.0) BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Configure TDU1 Port Map (continued)

Alpha Div 0

Alpha Div 1

Beta Div 0

Beta Div 1

Gamma Div 0

Gamma Div 1

Duplex or Triplex Modcell 3.0 Filter Panels

Filter 1 J8 J9

Filter 2 J8 J9

Filter 3 J8 J9

Filter 4 J8 J9

Filter 5 J8 J9

Filter 6 J8 J9

Slot 1

Slot 2

Slot 3

Slot 4

Slot 5

Slot 6

Alpha

Beta

Gamma

Dual Duplex Filter Panels (3 Sector)

Filter 1 Div 0 J8

Filter 2 Div 1 J28

Filter 3 Div 0 J8

Filter 4 Div 1 J28

Filter 5 Div 0 J8

Filter 6 Div 1 J28

Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 NOTE: Trace the cables from the TDU or MCR Port to the Filter. Filters are numbered 1 through 6 (from left to right) regardless if they are in a primary or growth frame. Also note that each Dual-Duplex filter has two Filter Panels associated with it.

Figure 118: Filter Numbering Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 341

9218 MACRO (FORMALLY MODCELL 4.0) BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Configure TDU1 Port Map (continued)

Step 10

Action Follow the table below to determine Antenna setting: IF TDU1 Port is connected to a filter in the AND the filter type is Modcell 3.0 Primary Frame Dual Duplex Modcell 3.0 Dual Duplex Growth-2 Frame No Filter Modcell 3.0 N/A AND the Diversity number is Diversity 0 Diversity 1 N/A Diversity 0 Diversity 1 N/A Diversity 0 Diversity 1 N/A THEN set Antenna to... 1 2 1,2 3 4 3,4 3 4 _NC_

Growth-1 Frame

11

Follow the table below to determine Filter Type setting: IF TDU1 Port is connected to ... Modcell 3.0 Filter Dual Duplex Filter No Filter THEN set Filter Type to ... Modcell3.0 DualDuplexer NoFilterPanel

12

Follow the table below to determine Coupler Type setting: IF TDU1 Port is connected to ... J3 Connector of a Modcell 3.0 Filter J2 Connector of a Modcell 3.0 Filter J41 Connector of a Dual Duplex Filter No Filter THEN set Coupler Type to ... Incident Reflected SwitchedBDT NoCoupler

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 342

9218 MACRO (FORMALLY MODCELL 4.0) BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Configure TDU1 Port Map (continued)
Step 13 Action Follow the table below to determine Filter Number setting: IF TDU1 Port is connected to ... AND the filter is in physical slot location 1 2 Modcell 3.0 Filter 3 4 5 6 1 Dual Duplex Filter 2 3 No Filter N/A THEN set Filter Number to 1 2 3 4 5 6 1,2 3,4 5,6 _NoFP_

NOTE: Refer to Figure 118, on page 341, for an example of filter slot numbering.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 343

9218 MACRO (FORMALLY MODCELL 4.0) BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Configure TDU1 Port Map (continued)
Step 14 Action Follow the table below to determine FP RF Path Num setting: IF TDU 1 Port is connected to AND filters transmit ports are being used as follows J8 connected to Primary frame UCR, J9 not used J8 and J9 both connected to Primary frame UCRs J8 connected to Primary frame UCR and J9 connected to Growth frame UCR J8 connected to Growth frame UCR and J9 connected to Primary frame UCR J9 connected to Primary frame UCR, J8 not used 15 16 Duplex Modcell 3.0 Filter, Dual Duplex Filter, or No Filter Panel N/A THEN set FP RF Path Num to ... 1 1 1

Triplex Modcell 3.0 Filter

2 1

Repeat Steps 9 -14 for each remaining Port Numbers. Proceed to the procedure Configure TDU2 Port Map on the next page.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 344

9218 MACRO (FORMALLY MODCELL 4.0) BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Configure TDU2 Port Map Follow the procedure to update the TDU2 port map information.

Step 1

Action Set TDU Number to 2 as shown in Figure 119 below. TDU Number

Figure 119: TDU 2 BTS RF Test Path Window


2 Set the Equipped field (located below tab) as shown below: IF TDU 1 is ... Equipped (See Note) c) THEN ... Place a check mark ( ) in the Equipped field (top left of window) Proceed to Step 3 on the next page. Uncheck the Equipped field Proceed to Configure the Radio RF Test Path Map Tab on page 350.

d) Not Equipped c) d)

NOTE: TDU 2 Equipped means: The frame must contain UCRs and the radios must be using a TDU to perform Closed Loop Gain Control (CLGC). Verify that the TDU is connected to the same OneBTS filters used by the UCRs.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 345

9218 MACRO (FORMALLY MODCELL 4.0) BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Configure TDU2 Port Map (continued)
Step 3 4 Action Set External RFS Cable Input to None. In the Test Unit Location box set the Digital Shelf field as shown below: IF TDU2 is located in a ... Primary Growth #1 Cabinet Growth #2 Cabinet 5 6 7 8 In the Test Unit Location box set the Filter Shelf to 1. In the Test Unit Location box set Slot Number to 2. Beginning with TDU 2 Port Number 1, trace the cable to the connection on the filter. Follow the table below to determine Sector setting: IF TDU2 Port is connected to Equipped in filter slot 1 or 2 Modcell 3.0 Filter 3 or 4 5 or 6 1 Dual Duplex Filter 2 3 No Filter N/A THEN set Sector to ... Alpha Beta Gamma Alpha Beta Gamma _NC_ THEN set Digital Shelf to ... 1 2 3

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 346

9218 MACRO (FORMALLY MODCELL 4.0) BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Configure TDU2 Port Map (continued)
Step 9 Action Follow the table below to determine Antenna setting: IF TDU2 Port is connected to filter in the AND the filter type is Modcell 3.0 Primary Frame Dual Duplex AND using THEN set Antenna to ... 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 3 4 _NC_

Diversity 0 Diversity 1 Port J11 Port J31 Diversity 0 Diversity 1 Port J11 Port J31 Diversity 0 Diversity 1 N/A

Modcell 3.0 Growth-1 Frame Dual Duplex Growth-2 Frame No Filter 10 Modcell 3.0 N/A

Follow the table below to determine Filter Type setting: IF TDU2 Port is connected to ... Modcell 3.0 Filter Dual Duplex Filter No Filter THEN set Filter Type to ... Modcell3.0 DualDuplexer NoFilterPanel

11

Follow the table below to determine Coupler Type setting: IF TDU2 Port is connected to ... Modcell 3.0 Filter, or Dual Duplex Filter No Filter THEN ... DPD NoCoupler

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 347

9218 MACRO (FORMALLY MODCELL 4.0) BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Configure TDU2 Port Map (continued)
Step 12 Action Follow the table below to determine Filter Number setting: IF TDU2 Port is connected to ... Filter 1 Filter 2 Filter 3 Filter 4 Filter 5 Filter 6 No Filter THEN set Filter Number to 1 2 3 4 5 6 _NoFP_

NOTE: This setting refers to the actual Filter number and NOT the physical slot number. Refer to Figure 118, on page 341, for more information on how filters are numbered. 13 Follow the table below to determine FP RF Path Num setting: IF TDU 2 Port is connected to a coupler on the J9 port of a Triplex filter 14 15 a coupler on the J8 port of a Duplex or Triplex filter, or any port on a Dual Duplex filter THEN set FP RF Path Num to 2 1

Repeat Steps 8-14 for each Port Number. Proceed to the procedure Set Radio Tab to Default on the next page.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 348

9218 MACRO (FORMALLY MODCELL 4.0) BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Set Radio Tab to Default Follow the procedure below to set the Radio RF Test Path Map to their default values. NOTE: The HD frame will support TDUs or MCRs, but not both. If the TDU Path Map is used, then set the MCR Tab to default values. Step 1 Action From the BTS RF Test Path Map window, click on the Radio RF Test Path Map tab. See below. Radio RF Test Path Map Tab Radio Number

Figure 120: Radio RF Test Path Map Tab


2 3 Click Recall button in the Configuration File box. Navigate to the directory below and select the file in bold: C:\Program Files\Lucent Technologies\RMT\config\1bts\IEH\RF TEST PM MCR RF TEST Unequipped.xml Click Open. NOTE: If the proper file was selected the Equipped field (located below tab) should be unchecked for all Radios (1-6). See Figure 120 above. Proceed to the procedure Configure the Radio RF Test Path Map Tab on the next page.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 349

9218 MACRO (FORMALLY MODCELL 4.0) BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Configure the Radio RF Test Path Map Tab Follow the procedure to update the MCR port map information. The MCR has 3 ports: Port 1 = RC1 (Receive CLGC 1) Port 2 = RC2 (Receive CLGC 2) Port 3 = TONE (Antenna Tests) NOTE: This procedure should only be used if MCRs are equipped in the frame and used to perform test diagnostics. Step 1 Action From the BTS RF Test Path Map window, click on the Radio RF Test Path Map tab. See below. Radio RF Test Path Map Tab Radio Number

Equipped Field

Figure 121: Radio RF Test Path Map Tab


2 Select the Radio Number (start with Radio 1).

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 350

9218 MACRO (FORMALLY MODCELL 4.0) BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Configure the Radio RF Test Path Map Tab (continued)

Step 3

Action Set the Equipped field (located below tab) as shown below: IF the MCR is ... Equipped AND connected to OneBTS Amplifiers e) THEN ... Place a check mark ( ) in the Equipped field (top left of window) Proceed to Step 4. Uncheck the Equipped field Proceed to Step 4. Uncheck the Equipped field Proceed to Step 4.

f) CAU (SII LAC) Not Equipped N/A c) d) e) f)

In the Test Unit Location box set the Digital Shelf field as shown below: IF the MCRs are connected to filters in the ... Primary Cabinet Growth #1 Cabinet THEN set Digital Shelf to ... 1 2

5 6

In the Test Unit Location box, set the Filter Shelf to 1. Proceed to Radio Tab Port 1 and Port 2 on next page.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 351

9218 MACRO (FORMALLY MODCELL 4.0) BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Radio Tab Port 1 and Port 2 Follow the procedure to update the following MCR Ports: Port 1 = RC1 (Receive CLGC 1) Port 2 = RC2 (Receive CLGC 2) Start with Port 1 and then repeat the steps for Port 2. Step 1 2 Action Trace the RC1 cable connected to the radio to the connection on the filter. Follow the table below to determine Sector setting: IF MCR Port is connected to a AND Equipped in filter slot 1 Dual Duplex Filter 2 3 No Filter N/A THEN set Sector to ... Alpha Beta Gamma _NC_

NOTE: Refer to Figure 118, on page 341, for an example of filter slot numbering. 3 Follow the table below to determine Antenna setting: IF MCR Port is connected to Dual Duplex Filter in the Primary Frame Dual Duplex Filter in the Growth-1 Frame No Filter 4 AND the Diversity number is Diversity 0 Diversity 1 Diversity 0 Diversity 1 N/A THEN set Antenna to ... 1 2 3 4 _NC_

Follow the table below to determine Filter Type setting: IF MCR Port is connected to ... Dual Duplex Filter No Filter THEN set Filter Type to ... DualDuplexer NoFilterPanel

Follow the table below to determine Coupler Type setting: IF MCR Port is connected to ... Dual Duplex Filter No Filter THEN set Coupler Type to ... DPD NoCoupler

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 352

9218 MACRO (FORMALLY MODCELL 4.0) BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
Radio Tab Port 1 and Port 2 (continued)
Step 6 Action Follow the table below to determine Filter Number setting: IF MCR Port is connected to Dual Duplex Filter No Filter THEN set Filter Number to ... 16 _NC_

NOTE: Use the filter number where the Radios RC1/RC2 Port is connected. Refer to Figure 118, on page 341, for an example of filter slot numbering. 7 8 9 Set the FP RF Path Num to 1. Trace the RC2 cable to the connection on the filter and then repeat Steps 2 7. Proceed to MCR Tab Port 3 below.

MCR Tab Port 3

Follow the procedure to update the following: Port 3 = TONE (Antenna Test) Step 1 2 Action Trace the RC3 cables to the connection on the filter. Follow the table below to determine Sector setting: IF MCR Port is connected to a AND Equipped in filter slot 1 Dual Duplex Filter 2 3 No Filter N/A THEN set Sector to ... Alpha,Alpha Beta,Beta Gamma,Gamma _NC_

NOTE: Refer to Figure 118, on page 341, for an example of filter slot numbering. 3 Follow the table below to determine Antenna setting: IF MCR Port is connected to Dual Duplex Filter in the Primary Frame Dual Duplex Filter in the Growth-1 Frame No Filter THEN set Antenna to ... 1,2 3,4 _NC_

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 353

9218 MACRO (FORMALLY MODCELL 4.0) BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued
MCR Tab Port 3 (continued)
Step 4 Action Follow the table below to determine Filter Type setting: IF MCR Port is connected to ... Dual Duplex Filter No Filter 5 THEN set Filter Type to ... DualDuplexer NoFilterPanel

Follow the table below to determine Coupler Type setting: IF MCR Port is connected to ... Dual Duplex Filter No Filter THEN set Coupler Type to ... SwitchedBDT NoCoupler

Follow the table below to determine Filter Number setting: IF MCR Port is connected to AND the filter is in slot 1 Dual Duplex Filter 2 3 No Filter N/A THEN set Filter Number to ... 1,2 3,4 5,6 _NC_

NOTE: Refer to Figure 118, on page 341, for an example of filter slot numbering. 7 8 9 Set the FP RF Path Num to 1. Repeat Radio Tab Port 1 and Port 2 on page 366 for each equipped MCR. Proceed to the FINAL PROCEDURES on page 377.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 354

9228 MACRO BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION


Section Description This section describes the procedures to verify and edit the BTS RF Test Path Map on the following products: When to Update the BTS RF Test Path Map 9228 Macro, 9226 Compact, 9222 Micro, 9228 Macro IN, 9228 Macro LP, 9224 Sub-Compact EN, 9224 Sub-Compact (with MCRs), 9226 Compact 450 MHz, 9216 Compact Distributed 450 MHz , 9228 Macro LP 2-Watt Composite AWS, 9228 Macro - Dual-Band AWS 9228 Macro Dual-Band Band Class-14 (G-Block)

BTS RF Test Path Maps are set in the factory based on the cabinet configuration and equipage. If problems are experienced during the integration efforts related to the BTS RF Test Path Map and/or when field changes are made to the cabinet, use the following procedures to update the path map information. This section gives instructions for populating each field of the BTS RF Test Path Map.

Configuration Aid Document (CA 100)

The procedures outlined in this section are supported with the .xml files packaged in the Configuration Aid (CA 100) document. The CA 100 document is available through the AlcatelLucent Customer Information Center (CIC) see CONFIGURATION AID (CA100) INSTALLATION on page 14 for information on accessing and loading this document. The CA 100 document includes: The various cell configurations, Configuration overview, Schematics, Backplane programming information, Applicable RF power calibration sections, and Packaged XML files.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 355

9228 MACRO BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued


Test Equipment Information MCR Connections The following provides test equipment information that pertains to the various Modcell configurations. For Flexent RF paths, the MCR connects to a Dual Duplex Filter (See Exception below). The MCR supports both Antenna Test and Closed Loop Gain Control (CLGC). The following ports on the MCR are used for these functions: MCR Test Port Filter Connection J11 (Dual-Duplex PCS or 850 filter) J11 (for AWS MCR radio using DualTriplex AWS/PCS Filter) RC1 J11 (for PCS MCR radio using DualQuadriplex filter) K11 (for AWS MCR radio using DualQuadriplex filter) J12 (for Band Class-14 (G-Block) MCR radio using Dual-Triplex filter) J31 (Dual-Duplex PCS or 850 filter) J31 (for AWS MCR radio using Dual Triplex AWS/PCS Filter) RC2 J31 (for PCS MCR radio using DualQuadriplex filter) K31 (for AWS MCR radio using DualQuadriplex filter) J32 (for Band Class-14 (G-Block) MCR radio using Dual-Triplex filter) TONE J41 (all filter types) Antenna Test CLGC (for Tx2 port) CLGC (for Tx1 port) Function

Exception: Note the following configuration: Legacy Modcell Primary frame with a Modcell 4.0 Growth 1 (supporting 8 850 Bband Carriers) In this configuration, radios 4, 5 and 6 can optionally be MCRs which connect to Modcell 3.0 Filters in the Legacy Primary frame. The MCR in this configuration does not support Antenna Test and CLGC and the RC1, RC2 and TONE ports are not used.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 356

9228 MACRO BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued


UCR450 Connections The UCR450 connects to a Dual Duplex Filter (Modcell 3 Filters are not supported.) The UCR450 is functionally similar to the MCR, except that the UCR450 supports CLGC only. The UCR450 radio does not provide Antenna Functional test capability. The following ports on the UCR450 are used for these functions: UCR450 Port CLGC 1 CLGC 2 Dual Duplex Filter Connection J11 J31 Function CLGC CLGC

NOTE: In the UCR450, there is no Port 3 or TONE port.

Radio Port Terminology

This section will refer to the UCR450 using the MCR port terminology. Port 1 (CLGC 1) will be referred to as RC1. Port 2 (CLGC 2) will be refereed to as RC2. Port Number Port 1 Port 2 UCR450 Port Label CLGC 1 CLGC 2 MCR Port Equivalent RC1 RC2 Function CLGC CLGC

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 357

9228 MACRO BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued


Save Original TDU RF Test Path Map Follow the procedure below to save the original TDU RF Test Path Map data on the BTS RF Test Path Map window.

Step 1

Action Click Config RF Calibration BTS RF Test Path Map from the main RMT window. The BTS RF Test Path Map window will appear as shown below: TDU RF Test Path Maps Tab URC to Update Box

Figure 122: TDU RF Test Path Map Tab


2 Verify that the TDU RF Test Path Map tab is selected as shown in Figure 122 above.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 358

9228 MACRO BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued


Save Original TDU RF Test Path Map (continued)
Step 3 Select the appropriate URC ID. IF saving ... URC 1 URC 2 URC 3 4 5 Click Save in the Configuration File Box. Type the filename as shown below and save it to a directory as desired. Cell X Original TDU RF Test Where: X = Cell Number NOTES: Refer to SAVE CONFIGURATION FILE on page 379 for procedures to create a directory to store files. When saving an xml file from the TDU RF Test Path Map tab, all TDU configuration data is saved (TDUs 1-4). THEN set Select the URC you want to update to 1 2 3 Action

6 7

Click Save in the Save As Box. Proceed to the procedure Save Original Radio RF Test Path Map on the next page.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 359

9228 MACRO BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued


Save Original Radio RF Test Path Map Follow the procedure below to save the original Radio RF Test Path Map data on the BTS RF Test Path Map window.

Step 1

Action From the BTS RF Test Path Map window, click on the Radio RF Test Path Map tab. See below. URC to Update Radio RF Test Path Map Tab

Figure 123: Radio RF Test Path Map Tab


2 Select the appropriate URC ID. IF saving ... URC 1 URC 2 URC 3 THEN set Select the URC you want to update to 1 2 3

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 360

9228 MACRO BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued


Save Original Radio RF Test Path Map (continued)
Step 3 4 Action Click Save in the Configuration File Box. Type the filename as shown below and save it to a directory as desired. Cell X Original MCR RF Test Where X = Cell Number NOTES: Refer to SAVE CONFIGURATION FILE on page 379 for procedures to create a directory to store files. When saving an xml file from the Radio RF Test Path Map tab, all MCR configuration data is saved (MCR 1 through MCR 6) Proceed to Configure TDU RF Test Path Maps Tab on the next page.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 361

9228 MACRO BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued


Configure TDU RF Test Path Maps Tab Follow the steps bellow to configure the RF Test Path Maps

Step 1 2 3

Action Click on the TDU RF Test Path Maps tab. Click Recall button in the Configuration File box. Navigate to the directory below and select the file in bold: C:\Program Files\Lucent Technologies\RMT\config\1bts\IEH\RF TEST PM TDU RF TEST Unequipped.xml Click Open. NOTE: If the proper file was selected the Equipped field (located below tab) should be unchecked for all TDUs (1-4). See Figure 124 below: Equipped Field (unchecked for TDU 1 4)

Figure 124: Unequipped TDU RF Test Path Map

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 362

9228 MACRO BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued


Configure TDU RF Test Path Maps Tab (continued)
Step 5 IF the frame type is ... Modcell 4.0B Primary (with Intelligent Antenna Calibration Unit (IACU)) Action THEN ... Select the Equipped field for TDU 1 and verify that the checkmark appears. See Figure 125 below. (TDUs 2 4 should remain unequipped) NOTE: Since the IACU is located in the TDU1 slot, equipping TDU1 in the backplane is actually equipping the IACU. Skip this step and proceed to step 6.

Any other configuration

Equipped Field (checked for TDU1 only)

Figure 125: Equipped TDU1 RF Test Path Map for IA only


6 Determine the next procedure using the table below: IF frame type is Base Station without Filters THEN proceed to the procedure ... BASE STATION (WITHOUT FILTERS) RADIO RF TEST PATH MAPS on page 376. Configure the Radio RF Test Path Maps Tab on the next page.

Any other configuration

Continued on next page Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 363

9228 MACRO BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued


Configure the Radio RF Test Path Maps Tab Follow the procedure to update the Radio RF Test Path Map information. The MCR has 3 ports: Port 1 = RC1 (Receive CLGC 1) Port 2 = RC2 (Receive CLGC 2) Port 3 = TONE (Antenna Tests) WARNING: DO NOT perform this procedure on any Base Station without Filters, proceed instead to BASE STATION (WITHOUT FILTERS) RADIO RF TEST PATH MAPS on page 376. Step 1 Action From the BTS RF Test Path Map window, click on the Radio RF Test Path Maps tab. See below. Radio RF Test Path Maps Tab Radio Number

Equipped Field

Figure 126: Radio RF Test Path Maps Tab


2 Select the Radio Number (start with Radio 1).

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 364

9228 MACRO BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued


Configure the Radio RF Test Path Maps Tab (continued)
Step 3 Action Set the Equipped field (located below tab) as shown below: IF the MCR is... Equipped g) h) Not Equipped g) h) THEN ... Place a check mark ( ) in the Equipped field (top left of window) Proceed to Step 4. Uncheck the Equipped field Proceed to Step 4.

In the Test Unit Location box set the Digital Shelf field as shown below: IF the MCRs are connected to filters in the ... Primary Cabinet Growth #1 Cabinet Growth #2 Cabinet Growth #3 Cabinet THEN set Digital Shelf to ... 1 2 3 4

5 6

In the Test Unit Location box, set the Filter Shelf to 1. IF the cell type is ... 9228 Base Station Macro LP with Filters Any other cell configuration THEN ... Proceed to Radio TabPort 3 on page 372. Proceed to Radio Tab Port 1 and Port 2 on next page.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 365

9228 MACRO BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued


Radio Tab Port 1 and Port 2 Follow the procedure to update the following MCR Ports: Port 1 = RC1 (Receive CLGC 1) Port 2 = RC2 (Receive CLGC 2) Start with Port 1 and then repeat the steps for Port 2. WARNING: DO NOT perform this procedure if the frame is a 9228 Base Station Macro LP or any Base Station without filters. For any Base Station without Filters proceed instead to BASE STATION (WITHOUT FILTERS) RADIO RF TEST PATH MAPS on page 376. For 9228 Base Station Macro LP with Filters proceed to Radio TabPort 3 on page 372.

Step 1 2

Action Trace the MCR RC1 cable to the connection on the filter. Follow the table below to determine Sector setting: IF the cell type is 9228 Macro (with sector 4, 5 or 6 equipped) AND radio port is connected to Filter Slot 1 Filter Slot 2 Filter Slot 3 Filter Slot 4 Filter Slot 5 Filter Slot 6 No Filter (or is not used) Any other Cell Configuration (1 3 Sectors) Filter Slot 1 Filter Slot 2 Filter Slot 3 Filter Slot 4 Filter Slot 5 Filter Slot 6 No Filter (or is not used) THEN set Sector to ... Alpha Beta Gamma Delta Epsilon Zeta _NC_ Alpha Beta Gamma Alpha Beta Gamma _NC_

NOTE: Refer to Figure 127 on the next page for an example of filter slot numbering.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 366

9228 MACRO BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Figure 127: Filter Slot Numbering (continued on next page) Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 367

9228 MACRO BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Figure 128: Filter Slot Numbering (continued from previous page) Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 368

9228 MACRO BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued


Radio Tab Port 1 and Port 2 (continued)
Step 3 Action Follow the table below to determine Antenna setting:

IF the frame is 9228 Macro IN

AND radio port is connected to 850 or AWS Diversity 0 Filter 850 or AWS Diversity 1 Filter PCS Diversity 0 Filter PCS Diversity 1 Filter No Filter (or is not used)

THEN set Antenna to... 1 2 3 4 _NC_ 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 _NC_ 3 4 _NC_ 1 2 _NC_

9228 Macro Primary (with Intelligent Antenna Calibration Unit (IACU))

Diversity 0 Filter in Slot 1,2 or 3 (Filter 1, 3 or 5) Diversity 1 Filter in Slot 1,2 or 3 (Filter 2, 4 or 6) Diversity 0 Filter in Slot 4, 5 or 6 (Filter 7, 9 or 11) Diversity 1 Filter in Slot 4, 5 or 6 (Filter 8, 10 or 12)

9228 Macro - PCS Growth-1 (with IACU equipped in 850 Primary Frame) 9228 Macro - DualBand (PCS / AWS) equipped with Quadriplex filters

Diversity 0 Filter in Slot 1,2 or 3 (Filter 1, 3 or 5) Diversity 1 Filter in Slot 1,2 or 3 (Filter 2, 4 or 6) Diversity 0 Filter in Primary or Growth frame Diversity 1 Filter in Primary or Growth frame No Filter (or is not used)

9228 Macro - DualBand Growth-1 (PCS / AWS) equipped with DualTriplex filters 9228 Macro - DualBand Growth-1 (PCS / G-Block) equipped with DualTriplex filters

Diversity 0 Filter in Growth frame Diversity 1 Filter in Growth frame No Filter (or is not used) Diversity 0 Filter in Growth frame Diversity 1 Filter in Growth frame No Filter (or is not used)

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 369

9228 MACRO BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued


Radio Tab Port 1 and Port 2 (continued)
Step 3 (cont.) Action Follow the table below to determine Antenna setting:

IF the frame is Any other cabinet type

AND radio port is connected to Diversity 0 Filter in a Primary frame Diversity 1 Filter in a Primary frame Diversity 0 Filter in a Growth 1, 2 or 3 frame Diversity 1 Filter in a Growth 1, 2, or 3 frame No Filter (or is not used)

THEN set Antenna to... 1 2 3 4 _NC_

Follow the table below to determine Filter Type setting: IF MCR Port is connected to ... Dual Duplex Filter -ORDual-Band (PCS/AWS or PCS/GBlock) Quadriplex or Dual-Triplex Filter No Filter (or is not used) THEN set Filter Type to ... DualDuplexer

NoFilterPanel

5 6

Set the Filter Shelf to 1. Follow the table below to determine Coupler Type setting: IF MCR Port is connected to ... Dual Duplex Filter -ORDual-Band (PCS/AWS or PCS/GBlock) Quadriplex or Dual-Triplex Filter No Filter (or is not used) THEN set Coupler Type to ...

DPD

NoCoupler

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 370

9228 MACRO BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued


Radio Tab Port 1 and Port 2 (continued)
Step 7 Action Follow the table below to determine Filter Number setting: IF MCR Port is connected to Dual Duplex Filter in Primary or Growth Frame THEN set Filter Number to... 1 12 NOTE: Use the filter number where the Radios RC1/RC2 Port is connected. Refer to Figure 114 on page 328 for an example of filter slot numbering. _NoFP_

No Filter (or is not used)

Follow the table below to determine FP RF Path Num setting:

IF MCR transmit port corresponding to the CLGC port in question (TX1 for RC1 or TX2 for RC2) is connected through the amplifier(s) to: Ports K8 or K28 on a Dual-band (PCS / AWS) DualQuadriplex filter or ports J9 or J29 on Dual-band (PCS / AWS or PCS / G-Block) Dual-Triplex filter Any other port OR- MCR Port Is Not Connected 9

THEN set FP RF Path Num to... 2

Follow the table below to determine if the MCR RC2 port is being used: IF the MCR RC2 port is ... Connected Not Connected THEN ... Repeat steps 2 7 for the RC2 cable Proceed to step 10.

10

Proceed to the procedure Radio TabPort 3 on the next page.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 371

9228 MACRO BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued


Radio TabPort 3 Follow the procedure to update the following: Port 3 = TONE (Antenna Test) WARNING: DO NOT perform this procedure If the frame is a 9228 Base Station Macro LP without Filters, proceed instead to BASE STATION (WITHOUT FILTERS) RADIO RF TEST PATH MAPS on page 376. Step 1 2 Action Trace the MCR TONE cable to the connection on the filter. Follow the table below to determine Sector setting: IF the cell type is 9228 Macro -OR9228 Macro Dual-Band (AWS/PCS) Equipped With Quadriplex Filters (with sector 4, 5 or 6 equipped) AND radio port is connected to Filter Slot 1 Filter Slot 2 Filter Slot 3 Filter Slot 4 Filter Slot 5 Filter Slot 6 No Filter (or is not used) 9228 Macro LP AWS 6-Sector Filter Slot 4 Filter Slot 5 Filter Slot 6 Filter Slot 1 Filter Slot 2 Filter Slot 3 No Filter (or is not used) Any other Cell Configuration (1-3 Sectors) Filter Slot 1 Filter Slot 2 Filter Slot 3 Filter Slot 4 Filter Slot 5 Filter Slot 6 No Filter (or is not used) THEN set Sector to ... Alpha,Alpha Beta,Beta Gamma,Gamma Delta,Delta Epsilon,Epsilon Zeta,Zeta _NC_ Alpha,Alpha Beta,Beta Gamma,Gamma Delta,Delta Epsilon,Epsilon Zeta,Zeta _NC_ Alpha,Alpha Beta,Beta Gamma,Gamma Alpha,Alpha Beta,Beta Gamma,Gamma _NC_

NOTE: Refer to Figure 127 on page 367 for an example of filter slot numbering.

Continued on next page Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 372

9228 MACRO BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued


Radio TabPort 3 (continued)
Step 3 Action Follow the table below to determine Antenna setting: IF the frame is 9228 Macro IN, or 9228 Macro LP (with Filters) AND radio port is connected to 850 or AWS Dual Duplex Filter PCS Dual Duplex Filter in a DualBand Frame (with both 850 and PCS) PCS Dual Duplex Filter in a NonDual Band Frame (with no 850) 9228 Macro Primary with Intelligent Antenna Calibration Unit (IACU) 9228 Macro PCS Growth-1 (with IACU equipped in the 9228 Macro 850 Primary Frame) 9228 Macro - DualBand (PCS / AWS) equipped with Quadriplex filters 9228 Macro - DualBand Growth-1 (PCS / AWS) equipped with DualTriplex filters (primary frame is legacy equipped with legacy PCS filters) 9228 Macro - DualBand Growth-1 (PCS / G-Block) equipped with DualTriplex filters Any other cabinet type Dual Duplex Filter in Slot 1,2 or 3 (Filter 1 through 6) Dual Duplex Filter in Slot 4, 5 or 6 (Filter 7 through 12) Dual Duplex Filter in Slot 1,2 or 3 (Filter 1 through 6) THEN set Antenna to... 1,2 3,4

1,2 1,2 3,4

5,6

Any filter in Primary or Growth frame No Filter (or is not used) Diversity 0 or 1 Filter in Growth frame No Filter (or is not used)

1,2 _NC_ 3, 4 _NC_

Diversity 0 or 1 Filter in Growth frame No Filter (or is not used)

1,2 _NC_

Dual Duplex Filter in the Primary Frame Dual Duplex Filter in the Growth-1, Growth-2, or Growth-3 Frame No Filter (or is not used)

1,2 3,4 _NC_

Continued on next page Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 373

9228 MACRO BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued


Radio TabPort 3 (continued)

Follow the table below to determine Filter Type setting: IF MCR Port is connected to ... Dual Duplex Filter -ORDual-Band (PCS/AWS or PCS/GBlock) Quadriplex or Dual-Triplex Filter No Filter (or is not used) THEN set Filter Type to ... DualDuplexer

NoFilterPanel

5 6

Set th Filter Shelf to 1. Follow the table below to determine Coupler Type setting: IF MCR Port is connected to ... Dual Duplex Filter -ORDual-Band (PCS/AWS or PCS/GBlock) Quadriplex or Dual-Triplex Filter No Filter (or is not used) THEN set Coupler Type to ...

SwitchedBDT

NoCoupler

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 374

9228 MACRO BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued


Radio TabPort 3 (continued)
Step 7 Action Follow the table below to determine Filter Number setting: IF the cell type is 9228 Base Station Macro IN, or 9228 Base Station Macro LP (with Filters) AND radio port is connected to Filter Slot 1 Filter Slot 2 Filter Slot 3 Filter Slot 4 Filter Slot 5 Filter Slot 6 Filter Slot 1 Filter Slot 2 Filter Slot 3 Any other Cell Configuration Filter Slot 4 Filter Slot 5 Filter Slot 6 No Filter (or is not used) THEN set Filter Number to... 7,8 9,10 11,12 1,2 3,4 5,6 1,2 3,4 5,6 7,8 9,10 11,12 _NoFP_

NOTE: Refer to Figure 127 on page 367 for an example of filter slot numbering. 8 9 10 Set the FP RF Path Num to 1. Repeat the procedure Configure the Radio RF Test Path Maps Tab on page 364 (starting with Step 2) for each equipped MCR. Proceed to the FINAL PROCEDURES on page 377.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 375

BASE STATION (WITHOUT FILTERS) RADIO RF TEST PATH MAPS


Base Station (without Filters) Radio RF Test Path Maps Tab Antenna Functional tests and CLGC are not supported in the Base Stations without filters. Follow the procedure below to unequip the Radio RF Test Path Map for all radios.

Step 1

Action From the BTS RF Test Path Map window, click on the Radio RF Test Path Maps tab. See below. Radio RF Test Path Maps Tab Radio Number

Figure 129: Base Station (without filters) Radio RF Test Path Map
2 3 Click Recall button in the Configuration File box. Navigate to the directory below and select the file in bold: C:\Program Files\Lucent Technologies\RMT\config\1bts\IEH\RF TEST PM MCR RF TEST - Unequipped.xml Click Open. NOTE: If the proper file was selected the Equipped field (located below tab) should be unchecked for all Radios (1-6). See Figure 108 above. Proceed to the FINAL PROCEDURES on page 377..

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 376

FINAL PROCEDURES
Apply the BTS RF Test Path Map After configuring the BTS RF Test Path Map, the data must be applied to the backplane. Use the procedure below to Apply the changes and perform final steps. Step 1 Action Click Apply from the BTS Primary RF Path Map Window. IF ... More that 1 URC is present in the frame. Only 1 URC is present in the frame 2 THEN ... Proceed to Step 2. Proceed to Step 3.

Click Confirm in the Synchronized EEPROM Write window.

Figure 130: Synchronized EEPROM Write


NOTE: RMT checks for the existence of other equipped URCs and prompt the user to update the backplane. Verify that all equipped URCs are shown and checked (). 3 4 5 Click DISCONNECT on the RMT screen. Click File Exit. Remove all test equipment connections from the cell.

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 377

FINAL PROCEDURES, Continued


Apply the BTS RF Test Path Map (continued)

Step 6 7 Reconnect the T1/E1.

Action

Determine the method to power cycle the digital shelf IF ... trying to maintain GPS lock THEN ... Reseat all the equipped URCs. CAUTION: May need to unscrew URCs before reseating the packs. Power Cycle the Digital Shelf.

Not trying to maintain GPS lock 8 9 Secure the cabinet door. Procedure complete.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 378

SAVE CONFIGURATION FILE


Save Settings Follow the procedure below to create a new folder and to save settings (i.e. xml file) to the newly created folder. Step 1 2 Action Click Save under the Configuration File box. Click the down arrow and select the My Documents Folder.

Create a new folder by clickin on the Create New Folder Icon.

Type in a name for the new folder. Example: Cell 123 Rename the Folder by typing the new name in this box

Continued on next page

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 379

SAVE CONFIGURATION FILE, Continued


Save Settings (continued)
Step 5 Action Double-Click on the new folder created in step 4 to open the directory.

Type in the file name in the File name box.

Click Save.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 380

HOW TO RECALL AND APPLY XML FILE


Recalling Existing XML File This procedure below is used during field installation upgrades if using a good known XML file from another cell, or using an XML file previously generated and stored on the laptop. document.

Step 1 2 3 4 Connect with RMT.

Action

Click Config RF Calibration BTS RF Test Path Map, from the RMT main screen. Save the original BTS Primary RF Path Map on your laptop. Select either the TDU RF Test Path Maps or Radio RF Test Path Maps tab and click on Recall under the Configuration File heading.

Select the desired XML file from your laptop, or of the CA 100 file directory. Below is an example only of XML files for Configuration 101 PR-1.

Open and Apply the RF Test Path Map to the backplane. See Apply the BTS RF Test Path Map on page 377.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 381

This page intentionally left blank.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 382

RF POWER CALIBRATION PROCEDURES


RMT 31.0 Job Aid Section JA400 GENERAL INFORMATION
Purpose All RF Power Calibration procedures have been removed from the RMT Job Aid. RF Power Calibration procedures are now in the CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual (401-703-408). The CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual can be accessed and downloaded at:

https://wireless.support.lucent.com/amps Login with valid user name and password, select: Release Information select: CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 383

This page intentionally left blank.

Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary See notice on cover page RMT 31.0 Job Aid November, 2008 384

Vous aimerez peut-être aussi